Nikon D5600 Manual User Guide And Product Specification

User Manual: Nikon-D5600-Manual-User-Guide-and-Product-Specification

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 424 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
En
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page xiii).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
place for future reference.
Your images. The world. Connected
Welcome to SnapBridge — Nikon’s new family of services to enrich
your image experience. SnapBridge eliminates the barrier between
your camera and compatible smart device, through a combination
of Bluetooth® low energy (BLE) technology and a dedicated app. The
stories you capture with your Nikon camera and lenses are
automatically transferred to the device as they are taken. They can
even be uploaded effortlessly to cloud storage services, inviting
access across all your devices. You can share your excitement, when
and where you want.
Download the SnapBridge app to get started!
Take advantage of the wide-ranging
convenience by downloading the
SnapBridge app onto your smart device
now. Through a few simple steps, this app
connects your Nikon cameras with a
compatible iPhone®, iPad® and/or
iPod touch® or smart devices running on
the AndroidTM operating system. The app
is available free from the website
(http://snapbridge.nikon.com), Apple
App Store® and Google PlayTM.
For the latest information on SnapBridge, visit the Nikon website for your
area (0xxi).
D5600 Model Name: N1538
i
The exciting image experience that SnapBridge offers…
A range of services that enriches your imaging life,
including:
Automatic picture transfer from camera to smart
device thanks to the constant connection between
the two devices — making online photo sharing
easier than ever
Upload of photos and thumbnail images to the
NIKON IMAGE SPACE cloud service
•Camera remote control
•Imprinting up to two pieces of credit
information (e.g. copyright, comments,
text and logos) on pictures
•Automatic update of camera’s date and
time info and location info
•Receive camera’s firmware updates
Nikon D5600, AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR
ii
To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all
instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read
by all who use the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
DThis icon marks cautions; information that should be
read before use to prevent damage to the camera.
AThis icon marks notes; information that should be read
before using the camera.
0This icon marks references to other pages in this
manual.
Nikon Manual Viewer 2
Install the Nikon Manual Viewer 2 app on your smartphone or
tablet to view Nikon digital camera manuals, anytime,
anywhere. Nikon Manual Viewer 2 can be downloaded free of
charge from the App Store and Google Play. Download of the
app and any product manuals requires an Internet
connection, for which fees may be levied by your phone or
Internet service provider.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0xiii–xvi).
iii
For Your Safety........................................................................... xiii
Notices........................................................................................ xvii
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)...................................... xxii
Introduction 1
Getting to Know the Camera...................................................... 1
The Camera Body .................................................................................. 1
The Mode Dial ........................................................................................ 4
The Viewfinder ....................................................................................... 5
The R (Info) Button.............................................................................. 6
The P Button ......................................................................................... 12
The Monitor ................................................................................. 13
Using the Touch Screen.................................................................... 15
Touch-Screen Photography ............................................................ 17
Viewing Pictures .................................................................................. 23
Using the Menus.................................................................................. 25
First Steps 26
Attach the Camera Strap .................................................................. 26
Charge the Battery.............................................................................. 26
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card......................................... 27
Open the Monitor ............................................................................... 29
Attach a Lens ........................................................................................ 30
Camera Setup ....................................................................................... 33
Focus the Viewfinder ......................................................................... 41
Tutorial 42
Camera Menus: An Overview ................................................... 42
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining ... 46
Table of Contents
iv
Basic Photography and Playback 47
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)..................................... 47
Basic Playback ............................................................................. 56
Deleting Unwanted Photographs................................................. 57
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation
(Scene Mode) 58
kPortrait........................................................................................ 59
lLandscape ................................................................................. 59
pChild ............................................................................................ 59
mSports .......................................................................................... 60
nClose up...................................................................................... 60
oNight Portrait............................................................................ 60
rNight Landscape ..................................................................... 61
sParty/Indoor ............................................................................. 61
tBeach/Snow.............................................................................. 61
uSunset ......................................................................................... 62
vDusk/Dawn ............................................................................... 62
wPet Portrait ................................................................................ 62
xCandlelight ................................................................................. 63
yBlossom ...................................................................................... 63
zAutumn Colors......................................................................... 63
0Food.............................................................................................. 64
v
Special Effects 65
%Night Vision.............................................................................. 65
SSuper Vivid................................................................................ 66
T Pop ............................................................................................ 66
UPhoto Illustration.................................................................... 66
'Toy Camera Effect .................................................................. 67
(Miniature Effect ...................................................................... 67
3Selective Color ........................................................................ 67
1Silhouette.................................................................................. 68
2High Key .................................................................................... 68
3Low Key...................................................................................... 68
Options Available in Live View ...................................................... 70
More on Photography 75
Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 75
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)........................................ 76
Quiet Shutter Release................................................................ 78
Self-Timer Mode ......................................................................... 79
Focus............................................................................................. 82
Focus Mode .......................................................................................... 82
AF-Area Mode ...................................................................................... 87
Focus Lock............................................................................................. 93
Manual Focus ....................................................................................... 95
Image Quality and Size ............................................................. 98
Image Quality....................................................................................... 98
Image Size ........................................................................................... 100
Using the Built-in Flash ........................................................... 101
Auto Pop-up Modes......................................................................... 101
Manual Pop-up Modes ................................................................... 103
ISO Sensitivity ........................................................................... 107
Interval Timer Photography................................................... 109
Restoring Default Settings ..................................................... 115
vi
P, S, A, and M Modes 118
Shutter Speed and Aperture ................................................. 118
Mode P (Programmed Auto) ........................................................ 119
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) .................................................... 121
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)................................................. 122
Mode M (Manual).............................................................................. 123
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ....................................... 125
Exposure.................................................................................... 128
Metering.............................................................................................. 128
Autoexposure Lock.......................................................................... 130
Exposure Compensation ............................................................... 132
Flash Compensation ....................................................................... 134
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows.................... 136
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................. 136
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......................................................... 138
White Balance........................................................................... 140
Fine-Tuning White Balance .......................................................... 143
Preset Manual.................................................................................... 145
Bracketing................................................................................. 151
Picture Controls ....................................................................... 155
Selecting a Picture Control ........................................................... 155
Modifying Picture Controls........................................................... 157
Creating Custom Picture Controls ............................................. 161
vii
Recording and Viewing Movies 164
Recording Movies .................................................................... 164
The P Button....................................................................................... 166
Movie Settings ................................................................................... 168
Time-Lapse Movies .................................................................. 171
Viewing Movies ........................................................................ 176
Editing Movies .......................................................................... 178
Trimming Movies.............................................................................. 178
Saving Selected Frames ................................................................. 182
Playback and Deletion 184
Full-Frame Playback ................................................................ 184
Thumbnail Playback ........................................................................ 185
Calendar Playback ............................................................................ 186
The P Button....................................................................................... 187
Photo Information ................................................................... 188
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 196
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................... 200
Rating Pictures.......................................................................... 201
Rating Individual Pictures.............................................................. 201
Rating Multiple Pictures ................................................................. 202
Selecting Photos for Upload .................................................. 203
Selecting Individual Photos .......................................................... 203
Selecting Multiple Photos ............................................................. 204
Deleting Photographs............................................................. 205
During Playback ................................................................................ 205
The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 206
Slide Shows ............................................................................... 208
Slide Show Options.......................................................................... 209
viii
Connections 210
Installing ViewNX-i.................................................................. 210
Copying Pictures to the Computer ...................................... 211
Printing Photographs ............................................................. 214
Connecting the Printer................................................................... 214
Printing Pictures One at a Time................................................... 215
Printing Multiple Pictures.............................................................. 216
Viewing Pictures on TV........................................................... 218
Camera Menus 220
DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images................................ 220
Playback Menu Options................................................................. 220
Playback Folder ......................................................................... 221
Playback Display Options ...................................................... 221
Image Review............................................................................. 221
Auto Image Rotation ............................................................... 222
Rotate Tall.................................................................................... 222
CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................................. 223
Shooting Menu Options ................................................................ 223
Reset Shooting Menu.............................................................. 225
Storage Folder ........................................................................... 225
File Naming................................................................................. 227
NEF (RAW) Recording.............................................................. 227
ISO Sensitivity Settings........................................................... 228
Color Space ................................................................................. 230
Long Exposure NR .................................................................... 230
High ISO NR................................................................................. 231
Vignette Control........................................................................ 231
Auto Distortion Control.......................................................... 232
Optical VR .................................................................................... 232
ix
ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings........................ 233
Custom Settings................................................................................ 234
Reset Custom Settings ............................................................ 235
a: Autofocus ................................................................................... 235
a1: AF-C Priority Selection...................................................... 235
a2: Number of Focus Points................................................... 236
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator .......................................... 237
a4: Rangefinder.......................................................................... 237
a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..................................... 238
b: Exposure..................................................................................... 239
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl............................................ 239
b2: ISO Display............................................................................ 239
c: Timers/AE Lock ......................................................................... 239
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .......................................... 239
c2: Auto off Timers.................................................................... 240
c3: Self-Timer .............................................................................. 241
d: Shooting/Display..................................................................... 241
d1: Exposure Delay Mode....................................................... 241
d2: File Number Sequence..................................................... 242
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display ................................................... 243
d4: Date Stamp........................................................................... 243
d5: Reverse Indicators.............................................................. 245
e: Bracketing/Flash ...................................................................... 246
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash............. 246
e2: Auto Bracketing Set........................................................... 251
f: Controls........................................................................................ 252
f1: Assign Fn Button ................................................................. 252
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button................................................... 254
f3: Assign Touch Fn................................................................... 255
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation......................................................... 256
x
BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup.............................................. 257
Setup Menu Options....................................................................... 257
Format Memory Card .............................................................. 259
Image Comment ....................................................................... 260
Copyright Information............................................................ 261
Time Zone and Date ................................................................ 262
Language..................................................................................... 262
Beep Options.............................................................................. 263
Touch Controls .......................................................................... 263
Monitor Brightness................................................................... 263
Info Display Format.................................................................. 264
Auto Info Display ...................................................................... 265
Info Display Auto Off ............................................................... 265
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ...................................................... 266
Flicker Reduction ...................................................................... 268
Slot Empty Release Lock......................................................... 268
Location Data............................................................................. 269
Remote Control ......................................................................... 270
Airplane Mode ........................................................................... 271
Connect to Smart Device....................................................... 271
Send to Smart Device (Auto) ................................................ 272
Wi-Fi............................................................................................... 272
Bluetooth..................................................................................... 273
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................. 274
Conformity Marking................................................................. 276
Firmware Version...................................................................... 276
xi
NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies....................... 277
Retouch Menu Options .................................................................. 277
Creating Retouched Copies.......................................................... 278
NEF (RAW) Processing ............................................................. 280
Trim ................................................................................................ 282
Resize............................................................................................. 283
D-Lighting.................................................................................... 285
Quick Retouch ............................................................................ 286
Red-Eye Correction................................................................... 286
Straighten .................................................................................... 287
Distortion Control ..................................................................... 287
Perspective Control.................................................................. 288
Fisheye .......................................................................................... 288
Filter Effects................................................................................. 289
Monochrome.............................................................................. 290
Image Overlay ............................................................................ 291
Color Outline............................................................................... 293
Photo Illustration....................................................................... 294
Color Sketch ................................................................................ 294
Miniature Effect.......................................................................... 295
Selective Color............................................................................ 296
Painting......................................................................................... 298
Side-by-side Comparison ....................................................... 298
mRecent Settings/OMy Menu ............................................. 300
Choosing a Menu.............................................................................. 300
m Recent Settings ............................................................................ 301
O My Menu......................................................................................... 301
xii
Technical Notes 305
Compatible Lenses.................................................................. 305
Compatible CPU Lenses................................................................. 305
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses....................................................... 308
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ......................... 315
Other Accessories.................................................................... 321
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter .................... 325
Caring for the Camera ............................................................ 327
Storage................................................................................................. 327
Cleaning............................................................................................... 327
Image Sensor Cleaning .................................................................. 328
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .................... 333
Available Settings.................................................................... 338
Troubleshooting...................................................................... 340
Battery/Display.................................................................................. 340
Shooting (All Modes) ...................................................................... 341
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................... 345
Playback............................................................................................... 346
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)................................ 348
Miscellaneous.................................................................................... 348
Error Messages......................................................................... 349
Specifications ........................................................................... 356
Lens Kits .................................................................................... 369
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR .............................. 369
AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED VR and
AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED....................... 375
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR ..................... 380
Memory Card Capacity ........................................................... 387
Battery Life................................................................................ 388
Index .......................................................................................... 390
xiii
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read
them.
For Your Safety
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a
high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
• Do not use while walking or operating a motor vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts
that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
• Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
• Keep dry.
Do not handle with wet hands.
Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
• Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
xiv
• Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens or camera.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
• Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor
vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction.
In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
• Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically
designated for use with this product.
When using batteries, chargers,
and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not:
- Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them
under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
- Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts.
When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
xv
• Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
• Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not touch moving parts of the lens or other moving parts.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury.
• Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
• Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
- Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
- Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
- Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
• Do not attempt to recharge EN-EL14a rechargeable batteries using
chargers not specifically designated for this purpose.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
xvi
WARNING (Batteries)
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
• Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation.
Cease charging
EN-EL14a rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• Prior to disposal, insulate battery terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals.
Recycle or dispose of batteries in accord with
local regulations.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xvii
•No part of the manuals included
with this product may be
reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any
language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written
permission.
•Nikon reserves the right to change
the appearance and specifications
of the hardware and software
described in these manuals at any
time and without prior notice.
•Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of
this product.
•While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete,
we would appreciate it were you to
bring any errors or omissions to the
attention of the Nikon
representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only
to users in European countries:
•This product is designated for
separate collection at an
appropriate collection point.
Do not
dispose of as household waste.
•Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences
for human health and the
environment that might result from
incorrect disposal.
•For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery
is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
•All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point.
Do not
dispose of as household waste.
•For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
xviii
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC rules.
These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
•Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user be notified
that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not
expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your
equipment.
Using other interface
cables may exceed the limits of Class
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State
of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this
product may expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of
California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Wash hands
after handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed.
This power unit
is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
D5600
xix
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
•Items prohibited by law from being copied
or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities,
government bonds, or local
government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are
stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities
which are circulated in a foreign
country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued
by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of
stamps issued by the government
and of certified documents
stipulated by law is prohibited.
•Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
or coupon tickets, except when a
minimum of necessary copies are to
be provided for business use by a
company.
Also, do not copy or
reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by
public agencies and private groups,
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
and meal coupons.
•Comply with copyright notices
Under copyright law, photographs
or recordings of copyrighted works
made with the camera can not be
used without the permission of the
copyright holder.
Exceptions apply
to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in
the case of photographs or
recordings of exhibits or live
performances.
xx
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data.
Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data.
Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky).
Be sure to also replace any
pictures selected for preset manual (0149).
Before discarding the camera or
transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the Wi-Fi >
Reset connection settings (0272) option in the camera setup menu to
delete any personal network information.
Care should be taken to avoid
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE http://www.mpegla.com
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty.
The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
xxi
DUse Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its
operational and safety requirements.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES
COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
ABefore Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages
or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
ALife-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available on-
line at the following sites:
•For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
•For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
•For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips,
answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital
imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from
the Nikon representative in your area.
See the following URL for contact
information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xxii
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration
Regulations (EAR).
The permission of the United States government is not
required for export to countries other than the following, which as of this
writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran, North Korea,
Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.
Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless
features of this product outside the country of purchase.
Notice for Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
xxiii
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices.
There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe.
Low power
wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects.
Many
studies of low-level RF exposures have not found any biological effects.
Some
studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such
findings have not been confirmed by additional research.
The D5600, which
is equipped with a LBEE5UW1FS (FCC ID:VPYLB1FS / IC ID:772C-LB1FS)
Wireless LAN Module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules.
Please refer
to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon Corporation, declares that the D5600 is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity
may be consulted at http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5600.pdf
Notice for Customers in Singapore
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations.
The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
Trade Name:
Model: D5600
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA103423
xxiv
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
•Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
•Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
•Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in
unauthorized access. Use secure networks only.
1Introduction
Introduction
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays.
You may find it helpful to bookmark this section
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
Getting to Know the Camera
14
12
13
1516
8
9
11
10
18
67
3
4
5
2
1
17
1AF-assist illuminator ........... 85, 237
Self-timer lamp.............................. 80
Red-eye reduction lamp ..102, 104
2Power switch............................33, 39
3
Shutter-release button
................. 52
4E/N button...............124, 132, 134
5Movie-record button .................165
6Live view switch................... 47, 164
7Mode dial...........................................4
8Built-in flash .................................101
9M/ Y button.............101, 103, 134
10 Eyelets for camera strap.............. 26
11 Fn button ...................................... 252
12 Mounting mark ............................. 30
13 Lens release button...................... 31
14 I/E button.............. 75, 76, 78, 79
15 Mirror............................................. 330
16 Lens mount..............................30, 96
17 CPU contacts
18 Body cap ................................ 30, 323
2Introduction
29
30
31
28
27
26
20 2119
22 23 24
25
19 Stereo microphone .................... 169
20 Accessory shoe
(for optional flash units) .......... 315
21 Eye sensor.................................8, 265
22 R
(information) button
.......6, 9, 115
23 Command dial
24 A/L button .....94, 130, 200, 254
25 Connector cover
26 G button ..................42, 115, 220
27 Speaker
28 Focal plane mark (E)...................96
29 USB connector ................... 211, 214
30 Connector for external
microphone ...............................170
31 Accessory terminal..................... 324
DClose the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use.
Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
DThe Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on
the magnetic devices.
3Introduction
32
47 33 34 35 36
37
39
40
38
414244 43 51
50
49
48
46
45
32 Viewfinder eyepiece.......... 5, 41, 80
33 Diopter adjustment control ....... 41
34 K button............................... 56, 184
35 P button........................ 12, 166, 187
36 Multi selector....................33, 39, 43
37 J (OK) button..................33, 39, 43
38 N-Mark (NFC antenna)................. 34
39 O button ................................ 57, 205
40 Memory card access lamp .......... 51
41 Battery-chamber cover
latch .................................27, 28, 325
42 Battery-chamber cover
..........................................27, 28, 325
43 W/Q button.................43, 185, 196
44 X button.............................. 185, 196
45 Tripod socket
46 Vari-angle monitor
....................13, 15, 47, 56, 184, 255
47 Rubber eyecup.............................. 80
48 HDMI connector cover .............. 218
49 Memory card slot cover ........27, 28
50 Power connector cover for
optional power connector ...... 325
51 Battery latch....................27, 28, 325
4Introduction
The Mode Dial
The camera offers a choice of the
following shooting modes.
P, S, A, and M Modes:
•P—Programmed auto (0119)
•S—Shutter-priority auto (0121)
•A—Aperture-priority auto (0122)
•M—Manual (0123)
Special Effects Modes (065)
Auto Modes:
•i Auto (047)
•j Auto (flash off) (047)
Scene Modes (058)
5Introduction
The Viewfinder
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit
for illustrative purposes.
7
12
3
4
5
6
8
1816
19
2120
11 12 149
17
10 1513
1 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d3,
Viewfinder grid display) ...243
2Focus points....................50, 90, 236
3AF area brackets......................41, 49
4Low battery warning ................... 46
5Monochrome indicator (displayed
in % mode or when the
Monochrome Picture Control or
a Picture Control based on
Monochrome is
selected) ............................... 65, 155
6“No memory card” indicator...... 27
7Focus indicator ........................50, 96
8Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator.......................................130
9Shutter speed ..............................118
10 Aperture (f-number) ..................118
11 Special effects mode
indicator......................................... 65
12 Bracketing indicator...................151
13 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 46
Number of shots remaining before
memory buffer fills ..................... 77
White balance recording
indicator ...................................... 146
Exposure compensation
value ............................................. 132
Flash compensation value........ 134
ISO sensitivity ..................... 107, 239
Capture mode indicator
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 46
15 Flash-ready indicator ................... 54
16 Flexible program indicator....... 120
17 Exposure indicator ..................... 124
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 132
Electronic rangefinder............... 237
18
Flash compensation indicator
... 134
19 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 132
20 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator .. 228
21 Warning indicator....................... 349
6Introduction
The R (Info) Button
Press the R button to view the information display or cycle
through display options.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography
To view shutter speed, aperture, the
number of exposures remaining, AF-area
mode, and other shooting information in
the monitor, press the R button.
R button
2
1
7
6
8
5
3
4
1Shooting mode
i auto/
j auto (flash off).....................47
Scene modes ............................58
Special effects mode ..............65
P, S, A, and M modes............. 118
2Shutter speed .............................. 118
Shutter-speed display ...... 121, 124
3Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator ...................................... 130
4Release mode.................................75
5Help icon ...................................... 349
6Aperture (f-number).................. 118
Aperture display................ 122, 124
7ISO sensitivity.............................. 107
ISO sensitivity display....... 107, 229
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 229
8z icon..............................................22
7Introduction
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
19
20
21
22
24
23
910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
9Satellite signal indicator............269
10 Wi-Fi connection indicator .......272
Eye-Fi connection indicator .....274
11 Bluetooth connection indicator
.......................................................273
Airplane mode.............................271
12 Touch Fn assignment.................255
13 Vignette control indicator ........231
14 Exposure delay mode ................241
15 Date stamp indicator .................243
16 Vibration reduction indicator
................................................ 32, 232
17 Flash control indicator...............246
Flash compensation indicator for
optional flash units ...................318
18 Battery indicator ........................... 46
19 Bracketing indicator...................151
20 AF-area mode indicator.............. 87
Focus point............................ 90, 236
21 Exposure indicator ..................... 124
Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 132
Bracketing progress
indicator ...................................... 154
22 ADL bracketing amount............ 152
23 Number of exposures
remaining...................................... 46
White balance recording
indicator ...................................... 146
Capture mode indicator
24 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 46
8Introduction
ATurning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or
press the shutter-release button halfway.
The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds (for
information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off
timers on page 240).
The monitor will also turn off if you cover the eye
sensor or look through the viewfinder.
AInfo Display Auto Off
The eye sensor will automatically turn the information display off if you
put your eye to the viewfinder while the standby timer is active.
The
display will turn on again when you remove your eye from the
viewfinder.
If desired, you can prevent the information display turning
off using the Info display auto off option (0265) in the setup menu.
Note, however, that regardless of the option selected the information
display will turn off when the standby timer expires.
9Introduction
❚❚ Live View and Movie Mode
To start live view, rotate the live view
switch during viewfinder photography
(047).
You can then press the R button
to cycle through display options as
shown below.
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording;
circled areas indicate the edges of the movie frame crop (the area
outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when movie indicators are
displayed).
Show detailed photo
indicators
Show movie indicators
(0164) *
Show basic photo indicators *Hide indicators*
Framing grid*
R button
10 Introduction
The Live View Display
Item Description 0
q Shooting mode The mode currently selected with
the mode dial.
47, 58,
65, 118
w Manual movie settings
indicator
Displayed when On is selected for
Manual movie settings in mode
M.
169
e Time remaining
The amount of time remaining
before live view ends
automatically.
Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
11
r Wind noise reduction
Displayed when On is selected for
Movie settings > Wind noise
reduction in the shooting menu.
169
t Microphone sensitivity Microphone sensitivity for movie
recording. 169
y Sound level
Sound level for audio recording.
Displayed in red if level is too high;
adjust microphone sensitivity
accordingly.
169
u Focus point
The current focus point.
The
display varies with the option
selected for AF-area mode (089).
49
w
e
t
r
y
q
u
11Introduction
Item Description 0
iMovie frame size The frame size of movies recorded
in movie mode. 168
oFocus mode The current focus mode. 83
!0 AF-area mode The current AF-area mode. 89
!1 “No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be
recorded. —
!2 Time remaining (movie
mode)
The recording time remaining in
movie mode. 165
!3 Exposure indicator
Indicates whether the photograph
would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings (mode M only).
124
DThe Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
automatically (010); the timer turns red 5 s before the auto off timer
expires (0240) or if live view is about to end to protect the internal
circuits.
Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear
immediately when live view is selected.
Movie recording will end
automatically when the timer expires, regardless of the amount of
recording time available.
!3
!2
!1
!0oi
12 Introduction
The P Button
To change the settings at the bottom of
the information display, press the P
button, then highlight items using the
multi selector and press J to view
options for the highlighted item.
You can
also change settings by pressing the P
button during live view.
•Image quality (098)
•Image size (0100)
•Auto bracketing (0151)
•HDR (high dynamic range) (0138)
•Active D-Lighting (0136)
•White balance (0140)
•ISO sensitivity (0107)
•Picture Control (0155)
•Focus mode (082)
•AF-area mode (087)
•Metering (0128)
•Flash mode (0102, 104)
•Flash compensation (0134)
•Exposure compensation (0132)
P button
Viewfinder photography
Live view
13Introduction
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.
The Monitor
Normal use: Fold the monitor
against the camera face out.
The
monitor is normally used in this
position.
Low-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
up to take shots in live view with
the camera held low.
High-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
down to take shots in live view
with the camera held high.
Self-portraits: Use for self-portraits
in live view.
The monitor shows
a mirror image of what will
appear in the final picture.
90° 180°
180°
14 Introduction
DUsing the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown.
Do not use force.
Failure to observe these precautions could damage the camera or
monitor.
To protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it
back face down against the camera body.
Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera.
15Introduction
Using the Touch Screen
The touch-sensitive monitor supports the following operations:
Flick
Slide
Stretch/Pinch
Flick a finger a short distance left or right
across the monitor.
Slide a finger over the monitor.
Place two fingers on the monitor and
move them apart or pinch them together.
16 Introduction
DThe Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films or when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands.
Do not use excessive force or touch the
screen with sharp objects.
DUsing the Touch Screen
The touch screen may not respond as expected if you attempt to
operate it while leaving your palm or another finger resting on it in
second location.
It may not recognize other gestures if your touch is
too soft, your fingers are moved too quickly or too short a distance or
do not remain in contact with the screen, or if the movement of the
two fingers in a pinch or stretch is not correctly coordinated.
AEnabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
option in the setup menu (0263).
Select Enable to enable touch
controls for shooting, playback, and menu navigation or Playback
only to enable touch controls for playback only.
17Introduction
Touch-Screen Photography
Tap icons in the shooting display to adjust camera settings (note
that not all icons will respond to touch-screen operations).
During live view, you can also take photographs by tapping the
monitor.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography
Use the touch screen to adjust settings in the information
display (06).
Scene/Effect Selection
In scene and special effects modes (058, 65), you can tap the
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect.
Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, you can tap the w icon next to the shutter
speed or aperture displays to view x and y controls, which you
can tap to choose a new value.
Tap 1 to exit when the operation
is complete.
18 Introduction
Shooting Options
To change camera settings (012), tap the z icon at the bottom
right corner of the display and then tap icons to display options
for the corresponding setting.
Tap the desired option to select it
and return to the previous display.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
19Introduction
❚❚ Live View Photography
Use the touch screen to take photographs and adjust settings.
Taking Photographs (Touch Shutter)
Touch your subject in the monitor to
focus.
Focus locks until you lift your
finger from the monitor to take the
photograph (note that the touch shutter
can not be used to focus when MF—
manual focus—is selected for focus mode).
For more
information on touch focus, see page 83.
To disable the touch shutter, tap the
icon at right.
The icon will change to
7, indicating that the shutter will no
longer be released when you lift your
finger from the monitor.
The touch shutter remains off (7) during movie recording, but
you can refocus at any time by touching your subject in the
monitor.
20 Introduction
DTaking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the 3 icon is displayed to show that touch shooting options are
active.
Use the shutter-release button to take photographs in
continuous shooting mode (076) and during movie recording.
Touch
shooting options can be used only to take pictures one at a time in
continuous shooting mode and can not be used to take photographs
during movie recording.
In self-timer mode (079), focus locks on the selected subject when
you touch the monitor and the timer starts when you lift your finger
from the screen.
At default settings, the shutter is released about 10 s
after the timer starts; the delay and number of shots can be changed
using Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0241).
If the option selected for
Number of shots is greater than 1, the camera will automatically take
pictures one after the other until the selected number of shots is
recorded.
21Introduction
Scene/Effect Selection
In scene and special effects modes (058, 65), you can tap the
shooting mode icon to choose a scene or effect.
Tap x or y to
view the different options and tap an icon to select and return to
the previous display.
Shutter Speed and Aperture
In modes S, A, and M, tapping the shutter speed or aperture
displays x and y controls, which you can tap to choose a new
value.
Tap 1 to exit when the operation is complete.
22 Introduction
Shooting Options
In live view, pressing the P button or tapping the z icon in the
monitor activates the information display (012, 166).
Tap a
setting to view options and then tap the desired option to select
it and return to live view.
If prompted to choose a value as shown
at right, edit the value by tapping u or v
and then tap the number or tap 0 to
select it and return to the previous
display.
To exit without changing settings, tap
2.
23Introduction
Viewing Pictures
The touch screen can be used for the following playback
operations (056, 184).
View other
images
Flick left or right to view other
images.
Scroll
rapidly to
other
images
In full frame view, you can touch
the bottom of the display to
display a frame advance bar,
then slide your finger left or right
to scroll rapidly to other images.
Frame advance bar
Zoom in
(photos
only)
Use stretch and pinch gestures to
zoom in and out and slide to
scroll (0196).
24 Introduction
View
thumbnails
To “zoom out” to a thumbnail
view (0185), use a pinch
gesture in full-frame playback.
Use pinch and stretch to choose
the number of images displayed
from 4, 12, or 80 frames.
View movies
Tap the on-screen guide to start
movie playback (movies are
indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the
display to pause or resume, or
tap 1 to exit to full-frame
playback (note that some of the
icons in the movie playback
display do not respond to touch-
screen operations).
Guide
25Introduction
Using the Menus
The touch screen can be used for the following menu
operations.
Scroll Slide up or down to scroll.
Choose a
menu
Tap a menu icon to choose a
menu.
Select
options/
adjust
settings
Tap menu items to display
options and tap icons or sliders
to change. To exit without
changing settings, tap 1.
26 First Steps
First Steps
Attach the Camera Strap
Attach the strap securely to the two camera eyelets.
Charge the Battery
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the
plug adapter as shown below at left, making sure the plug is fully
inserted.
Insert the battery and plug the charger in.
An
exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour and
50 minutes.
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii–xvi and 333–337
of this manual.
Battery charging
Charging complete
27First Steps
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position.
Insert the
battery as shown, using the battery to keep the orange battery
latch pressed to one side.
The latch locks the battery in place
when the battery is fully inserted.
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it in
until it clicks into place.
Battery latch
AThe Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed.
Three days of charging will power the clock for about a
month.
If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the
clock has been reset.
Set the clock to the correct time and date.
28 First Steps
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards
Removing the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera
off and open the battery-chamber cover.
Press the battery latch in the direction
shown by the arrow to release the
battery and then remove the battery by
hand.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card
access lamp is off, turn the camera off,
open the memory card slot cover, and
press the card in to eject it (q).
The card
can then be removed by hand (w).
DMemory Cards
•Memory cards may be hot after use.
Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
•Do not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off,
or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
•Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
•Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
•Do not apply force to the card casing.
Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
•Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct
sunlight.
•Do not format memory cards in a computer.
16
GB
29First Steps
Open the Monitor
Open the monitor as shown.
Do not use force.
30 First Steps
Attach a Lens
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the
lens or body cap is removed.
The lens generally used in this
manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR.
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
Remove the camera
body cap
Remove the rear
lens cap
Mounting mark (lens)
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place.
31First Steps
ALenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
Before using the camera, unlock and extend the lens.
Keeping the
retractable lens barrel button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as
shown (w).
Pictures can not be taken when the lens is
retracted; if an error message is displayed as
a result of the camera having been turned
on with the lens retracted, rotate the zoom
ring until the message is no longer
displayed.
ADetaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses.
To remove the lens,
press and hold the lens release button (q)
while turning the lens clockwise (w).
After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
AA-M, M/A-M, and A/M-M Switches
When using autofocus with a lens equipped
with an A-M mode switch, slide the switch to
A (if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch,
select M/A or A/M).
For information on other
lenses that can be used with this camera, see
page 305.
Retractable lens barrel button
32 First Steps
AVibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by
selecting On for Optical VR in the shooting
menu (0232), if the lens supports this
option, or by sliding the lens vibration
reduction switch to ON, if the lens is
equipped with a vibration reduction switch.
A vibration reduction indicator appears in
the information display when vibration
reduction is on.
ARetracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
To retract the lens when the camera is not in
use, press and hold the retractable lens
barrel button (q) and rotate the zoom ring
to the “L” (lock) position as shown (w).
Retract the lens before removing it from the
camera, and be careful not to press the
retractable lens barrel button when
attaching or removing the lens.
33First Steps
Camera Setup
❚❚ Setup from a Smartphone or Tablet
Before proceeding, install the SnapBridge app as
described inside the front cover and enable
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on your smartphone or tablet
(below, “smart device”).
Note that the actual camera
and smart device displays may differ from those shown below.
1Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
Use the multi selector and J button to navigate the menus.
Press 1 and 3 to highlight a language and press J to select.
The language can be changed at any time using the
Language option in the setup menu.
1 Up
J button (select)
4 Left 2 Right
3 Down
Multi selector
Power switch
34 First Steps
2Press J when the dialog at right is
displayed.
If you do not wish to use a smart
device to configure the camera, press
G (040).
3Pair the camera and the smart
device.
•Android devices with NFC support: After
checking that NFC is enabled on the
smart device, touch the camera
H(N-Mark) to the NFC antenna on
the smart device to launch the
SnapBridge app.
If the SnapBridge
download site is displayed,
download and install the app before repeating the above
steps.
•iOS devices and Android devices without
NFC support: Press the camera J
button.
The camera will wait for a
connection; launch the SnapBridge
app on the smart device and follow
the on-screen instructions to tap the
name of the camera you want to pair
with.
D5600
Connect to Camera
Camera name
35First Steps
4Check the authentication code.
After confirming that the camera and
smart device display the same six-
digit authentication code, follow the
steps below to complete pairing (note
that the code may not be displayed in
some versions of iOS, but you should
follow the steps below even if the code is not displayed).
•On the camera, press J.
•On the smart device, tap PAIR (the name of the button varies
with the smart device).
5Press J when the dialog at right is
displayed.
You have now established a constant
connection between the camera and
smart device.
If the camera displays
Unable to connect., the display will
change after a short pause.
Return to Step 3.
Camera
36 First Steps
6Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup
process.
To record location data with photographs, select Yes when
prompted and enable the location data features both in the
SnapBridge app and on the smart device itself (for more
information, see the documentation provided with the smart
device).
You can also synchronize the camera clock to the
time reported by the smart device by selecting Yes when
prompted and enabling synchronization in the SnapBridge
app.
If you select No, set the camera clock from the menus as
described in Step 3 on page 40.
Setup is complete when the camera returns to the shooting
display.
See page 37 for more information on using
SnapBridge.
37First Steps
AWhat SnapBridge Can Do for You
The SnapBridge app can be used for a variety of tasks once the camera
has been paired with your smart device.
For more information on the
features below, see SnapBridge online help.
Auto Upload
At default settings, JPEG photographs will automatically be uploaded
to the smart device as they are taken (auto upload is not available with
movies or with NEF/RAW images, and is automatically suspended
when the battery level drops to H).
Before uploading pictures, place
the smart device close to the camera and launch the SnapBridge app.
Here are some tips for uploading pictures:
•Disabling auto upload: To disable auto upload, select Off for Send to
smart device (auto) in the camera setup menu (0272).
•Uploading selected pictures: To upload pictures not previously sent using
auto upload, press the camera P button during playback and select
pictures using Select to send to smart device/deselect (0203), or
select pictures using the Select to send to smart device option in
the camera playback menu (0204).
Note that as long as a constant
connection is in effect between the camera and smart device,
pictures will be uploaded automatically even when the camera is off.
Upload is however automatically suspended when the battery level
drops to H.
•Resizing pictures for upload: Choose an upload size in the SnapBridge
app.
The default is 2 megapixels.
•Embedding photo info: Use the SnapBridge app to choose the
information you want imprinted on photographs copied to the smart
device.
Comments and copyright information can be entered in
advance from the camera setup menu.
You can also imprint text
entered in the SnapBridge app.
38 First Steps
Tips for Wireless Networks
•Pairing: To pair the camera with a smart device (for example, with a
new device or if you did not opt to pair with a smart device during
setup), select Set for Connect to smart device in the camera setup
menu and follow the instructions on page 34, starting with Step 3.
The camera can be paired with up to five smart devices, but can
connect to only one at a time.
•Uploading pictures via Wi-Fi: A Wi-Fi connection is recommended for
movies and other large-volume uploads.
Follow the on-screen
instructions in the SnapBridge app to switch to a Wi-Fi connection.
The Wi-Fi > Network settings item in the camera setup menu
contains Authentication/encryption and Password options.
The
default option for Authentication/encryption is WPA2-PSK-AES.
Other Features of the SnapBridge App
•Remote photography: The camera shutter can be released remotely from
the smart device using the SnapBridge app.
Be sure the camera is on
before attempting to take pictures.
•Viewing pictures from the smart device: Use the smart device to view and
download the pictures on the camera.
This option is available even
when the camera is off.
AWhere the Use of Wireless Devices Is Prohibited
Where the use of wireless devices is prohibited, disable wireless
features in the camera setup menu by selecting Enable for Airplane
mode.
This will temporarily interrupt the constant connection with
the smart device, but the connection is automatically re-established
when airplane mode is disabled.
39First Steps
❚❚ Setup from the Camera Menus
The camera clock can be set manually.
1Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
Use the multi selector and J button to navigate the menus.
Press 1 and 3 to highlight a language and press J to select.
The language can be changed at any time using the
Language option in the setup menu.
1 Up
J button (select)
4 Left 2 Right
3 Down
Multi selector
Power switch
40 First Steps
2Press G when the dialog at right is
displayed.
3Set the camera clock.
Use the multi selector and J button to set the camera clock.
The clock can be adjusted at any time using the Time zone
and date > Date and time option in the setup menu.
qw
Select time zone Select date format
er
Select daylight saving time
option
Set time and date (note that the
camera uses a 24-hour clock)
G button
41First Steps
Focus the Viewfinder
After removing the lens cap,
rotate the diopter adjustment
control until the AF area
brackets are in sharp focus.
When operating the control
with your eye to the
viewfinder, be careful not to
put your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
The camera is now ready for use.
Proceed to page 47 for
information on taking photographs.
AF area
brackets
Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus
42 Tutorial
Tutorial
Most shooting, playback, and setup
options can be accessed from the camera
menus.
To view the menus, press the
G button.
Camera Menus: An Overview
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
•D: Playback (0220) •N: Retouch (0277)
•C: Shooting (0223) •m/O: Recent settings or My Menu
(defaults to Recent settings;
0300)
•A: Custom Settings (0233)
•B: Setup (0257)
Help icon (043)
G button
Current settings are shown by
icons.
Slider shows position in
current menu.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
43Tutorial
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the
camera menus.
AThe d (Help) Icon
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, a
description of the currently selected option or menu can be displayed
by pressing the W (Q) button.
Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the
display.
Press W (Q) again to return to the menus.
2: Select highlighted item
or display sub-menu
1: Move cursor up
3: Move cursor down
J button: select
highlighted item
4: Cancel and return to
previous menu
W (Q) button
44 Tutorial
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1Display the menus.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
2Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
3Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
G button
45Tutorial
5Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu item.
7Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option.
8Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit
without making a selection, press the G button.
Note the following:
•Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently
available.
•While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J,
there are some cases in which selection can only be made by
pressing J.
•To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (052).
46 Tutorial
Press the R button and check the battery level and number of
exposures remaining in the information display.
Battery Level
If the battery is low, a warning will also be displayed in the
viewfinder. If the information display does not appear when the
R button is pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be
recharged.
Number of Exposures Remaining
Values over 1000 are shown in thousands, indicated by the letter
“k”.
The Battery Level and Number of
Exposures Remaining
Information
display Viewfinder Description
L— Battery fully charged.
K— Battery partially discharged.
HdLow battery.
Ready fully-charged spare
battery or prepare to charge battery.
H
(flashes)
d
(flashes) Battery exhausted.
Charge battery.
Battery level
R button Number of exposures
remaining
47Basic Photography and Playback
Basic Photography and Playback
This section describes how to take
photographs in i and j modes.
i and j are
automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which
the majority of settings are controlled by the
camera in response to shooting conditions; the
only difference between the two is that the
flash will not fire in j mode.
1Rotate the mode dial to i
or j.
Photographs can be framed in the
viewfinder or in the monitor (live
view).
To start live view, rotate the live
view switch.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (iand j)
Framing pictures in the
viewfinder
Framing pictures in the
monitor (live view)
Mode dial
Live view switch
48 Basic Photography and Playback
2Ready the camera.
Viewfinder photography: When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle
the camera body or lens with your left.
Bring your elbows in
against the sides of your chest.
Live view: When framing photographs in the monitor, hold the
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the lens with your left.
AFraming Photographs in Portrait (Tall) Orientation
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown below.
Framing photographs in the
viewfinder
Framing photographs in the
monitor
49Basic Photography and Playback
3Frame the photograph.
Viewfinder photography: Frame a
photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in the AF area brackets.
Live view: At default settings, the
camera automatically detects faces
and selects the focus point.
If no face
is detected, the camera will focus on
subjects near the center of the frame.
AUsing a Zoom Lens
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to
adjust the focal length and frame the
photograph. Use the zoom ring to zoom in
on the subject so that it fills a larger area of
the frame, or zoom out to increase the area
visible in the final photograph (select longer
focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to
zoom in, shorter focal lengths to zoom out).
AF area brackets
Focus point
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom ring
50 Basic Photography and Playback
4Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Viewfinder photography: Press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus
(if the
subject is poorly lit, the
flash may pop up and the
AF-assist illuminator may
light). When the focus
operation is complete, a
beep will sound (a beep
may not sound if the subject is moving) and the active focus
point and in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.
Live view: The focus point flashes green
while the camera focuses.
If the
camera is able to focus, the focus
point will be displayed in green;
otherwise, the focus point will flash
red.
In-focus indicator Description
ISubject in focus.
I (flashes) Camera unable to focus using autofocus.
See
page 86.
Focus point
In-focus indicator
51Basic Photography and Playback
5Shoot.
Smoothly press the
shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to
take the photograph.
The
memory card access lamp
will light and the
photograph will be
displayed in the monitor
for a few seconds.
Do not
eject the memory card or
remove or disconnect the
power source until the lamp
has gone out and recording
is complete.
Rotate the live view switch to exit live
view.
Memory card access
lamp
52 Basic Photography and Playback
AThe Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button.
The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To take
the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down.
Focus: press halfway Shoot: press all the
way down
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and
readies the camera for immediate use.
AAutomatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the
camera will automatically analyze the
subject and select the appropriate
shooting mode when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway to focus using
autofocus. The selected mode is shown in
the monitor.
cPortrait Human portrait subjects
dLandscape Landscapes and cityscapes
eClose up Subjects close to the camera
fNight portrait Portrait subjects framed against a dark
background
ZAuto Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not
fall into the categories listed above
bAuto (flash off)
53Basic Photography and Playback
AThe Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder display will turn off if no operations are
performed for about eight seconds, reducing the drain on
the battery.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
reactivate the display.
The length of time before the
standby timer expires automatically can be selected using
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0240).
Exposure meters off Exposure meters on
AThe Standby Timer (Live View)
The monitor will turn off if no operations are performed for about ten
minutes.
The length of time before the monitor turns off automatically
can be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0240).
ALive View Zoom Preview
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 8.3× for precise focus,
press the X button.
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a
navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right
corner of the display.
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the
frame not visible in the monitor, or press W(Q) to zoom out.
X button Navigation window
54 Basic Photography and Playback
AThe Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct
exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will
pop up automatically when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (0101).
If the flash is raised, photographs can only
be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M)
is displayed.
If the flash-ready indicator is
not displayed, the flash is charging; remove
your finger briefly from the shutter-release
button and try again.
When the flash is not in use, return it to its
closed position by pressing it gently
downward till the latch clicks into place.
AExposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would
be obtained when live view is not used.
55Basic Photography and Playback
DShooting in Live View Mode
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright regions or bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs
and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In
addition, distortion may occur with moving subjects, particularly if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high
speed through the frame.
Flicker and banding visible in the monitor
under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced
using Flicker reduction (0268), although they may still be visible in
the final photograph at some shutter speeds.
Avoid pointing the
camera at the sun or other strong light sources.
Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the
monitor does not end live view on televisions or other external
displays).
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap before taking pictures without your eye to the
viewfinder (080).
AHDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens.
If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
setup menu (0219) before shooting in live view.
56 Basic Photography and Playback
1Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the
monitor.
2View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or
2.
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
Basic Playback
K button
57Basic Photography and Playback
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor,
press the O button.
Note that photographs can not be recovered
once deleted.
1Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete.
2Delete the photograph.
Press the O button.
A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; press the O
button again to delete the image and
return to playback.
ADelete
The Delete option in the playback menu can be used to delete
multiple images (0206).
K button
O button
58 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Matching Settings to the Subject or
Situation (Scene Mode)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes.
Choosing a scene
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 47.
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to h and rotating the command dial until the desired scene
appears in the monitor.
Mode dial Command dial Monitor
+
kPortrait
lLandscape
pChild
mSports
nClose up
oNight Portrait
rNight Landscape
sParty/Indoor
tBeach/Snow
uSunset
vDusk/Dawn
wPet Portrait
xCandlelight
yBlossom
zAutumn Colors
0Food
59Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
kPortrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-
looking skin tones.
If the subject is
far from the background or a
telephoto lens is used, background
details will be softened to lend the
composition a sense of depth.
lLandscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in
daylight.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
pChild
Use for snapshots of children.
Clothing and background details
are vividly rendered, while skin
tones remain soft and natural.
60 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
mSports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion
for dynamic sports shots in which
the main subject stands out clearly.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
nClose up
Use for close-up shots of flowers,
insects, and other small objects (a
macro lens can be used to focus at
very close ranges).
oNight Portrait
Use for a natural balance between
the main subject and the
background in portraits taken
under low light.
61Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
rNight Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors
when photographing night
landscapes, including street
lighting and neon signs.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
sParty/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor
background lighting.
Use for
parties and other indoor scenes.
tBeach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit
expanses of water, snow, or sand.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
62 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
uSunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in
sunsets and sunrises.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
vDusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the
weak natural light before dawn or
after sunset.
ANote
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
wPet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
ANote
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
63Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
xCandlelight
For photographs taken by
candlelight.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
yBlossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes
featuring expanses of blossoms.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
zAutumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and
yellows in autumn leaves.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
64 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
0Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
ANote
For flash photography, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash (0103).
APreventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
65Special Effects
Special Effects
Special effects can be used when taking photographs and
shooting movies.
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial
to q and rotating the command dial until the desired option
appears in the monitor.
Mode dial Command dial Monitor
+
%Night Vision
SSuper Vivid
TPop
UPhoto Illustration
'Toy Camera Effect
(Miniature Effect
3Selective Color
1Silhouette
2High Key
3Low Key
%Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high
ISO sensitivities.
ANote
Autofocus is available in live view only; manual focus can be used if the
camera is unable to focus.
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
66 Special Effects
SSuper Vivid
Overall saturation and contrast are
increased for a more vibrant image.
T Pop
Overall saturation is increased for a
more lively image.
UPhoto Illustration
Sharpen outlines and simplify
coloring for a poster effect that can
be adjusted in live view (070).
ANote
Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series
of stills.
67Special Effects
'Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies that
appear to have been shot with a toy
camera.
The effect can be adjusted
in live view (071).
(Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be
pictures of dioramas.
Works best
when shooting from a high vantage
point.
Miniature effect movies play
back at high speed, compressing
about 45 minutes of footage shot at
1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that
plays back in about three minutes.
The effect can be adjusted in live
view (072).
ANote
Sound is not recorded with movies.
The built-in flash and AF-assist
illuminator turn off.
3Selective Color
All colors other than the selected
colors are recorded in black and
white.
The effect can be adjusted in
live view (073).
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
68 Special Effects
1Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
2High Key
Use with bright scenes to create
bright images that seem filled with
light.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
3Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark,
low-key images with prominent
highlights.
ANote
The built-in flash turns off.
69Special Effects
ANEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, S, T, U, ', (, and 3 modes.
Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is
selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images.
JPEG images
created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected
JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be
recorded as fine-quality images.
AU and ( Modes
Autofocus is not available during movie recording.
The live view
refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous
release modes; using autofocus during live view photography will
disrupt the preview.
APreventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter
speeds.
70 Special Effects
Options Available in Live View
Settings for the selected effect are adjusted in the live view
display.
❚❚ UPhoto Illustration
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Adjust outline thickness.
Press J to display the options shown
at right.
Press 4 or 2 to make
outlines thicker or thinner.
3Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To exit live view,
rotate the live view switch.
Live view switch
71Special Effects
❚❚ ' Toy Camera Effect
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown
at right.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Vignetting and press 4
or 2 to change.
Adjust vividness to
make colors more or less saturated,
vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.
3Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To exit live view,
rotate the live view switch.
Live view switch
72 Special Effects
❚❚ (Miniature Effect
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the
focus point in the area that will be in
focus and then press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus.
To
temporarily clear miniature effect
options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor
for precise focus, press X.
Press W (Q) to restore the
miniature effect display.
3Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect
options.
4Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in
focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its
width.
Live view switch
73Special Effects
5Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
To exit live view,
rotate the live view switch.
❚❚ 3Selective Color
1Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch.
The view
through the lens will be displayed in
the monitor.
2Display options.
Press J to display selective color
options.
3Select a color.
Frame an object in the white square in
the center of the display and press 1
to choose the color of the object as
one that will remain in the final image
(the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color).
To zoom in on the center of the display for
more precise color selection, press X.
Press W (Q) to zoom
out.
Live view switch
Selected color
74 Special Effects
4Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final image.
Choose
from values between 1 and 7; note
that higher values may include hues
from other colors.
5Select additional colors.
To select additional colors, rotate the
command dial to highlight another of
the three color boxes at the top of the
display and repeat Steps 3 and 4 to
select another color.
Repeat for a
third color if desired.
To deselect the highlighted color, press
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O.
A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; select Yes ).
6Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete.
During shooting,
only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all
others will be recorded in black-and-white.
To exit live view,
rotate the live view switch.
Color range
75More on Photography
More on Photography
To choose how the shutter is released
(release mode), press the I (E) button,
then highlight the desired option and
press J.
Choosing a Release Mode
Mode Description
8Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
!Continuous L: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while
the shutter-release button is pressed (076).
9Continuous H: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while
the shutter-release button is pressed (076).
JQuiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise
is reduced (078).
ESelf-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (079).
AChoosing a Release Mode with the Command Dial
The release mode can also be selected by keeping the I (E) button
pressed while rotating the command dial.
Release the I(E) button
to select the highlighted option and return to the information display.
I (E) button
76 More on Photography
In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the
camera takes photographs continuously while the shutter-
release button is pressed all the way down.
1Press the I (E) button.
2Choose a continuous release mode.
Highlight ! (Continuous L) or
9(Continuous H) and press J.
3Focus.
Frame the shot and focus.
4Take photographs.
The camera will take photographs
while the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
I (E) button
77More on Photography
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card.
Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession
(an exception is if a shutter speed of 4 seconds or slower is selected in
mode S or M, when there is no limit on the number of shots that can be
taken in a single burst).
If the battery is exhausted while images
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the
images transferred to the memory card.
AFrame Rate
For information on the number of photographs can be taken in
continuous release modes, see page 357.
Frame rates may drop when
the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.
AThe Built-in Flash
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash;
rotate the mode dial to j (047) or turn the flash off (0102).
ABuffer Size
The approximate number of images that
can be stored in the memory buffer at
current settings is shown in the viewfinder exposure-count display
while the shutter-release button is pressed.
78 More on Photography
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum.
A beep
does not sound when the camera focuses.
1Press the I (E) button.
2Select J (Quiet shutter release).
Highlight J (Quiet shutter release)
and press J.
3Take pictures.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down to shoot.
Quiet Shutter Release
I (E) button
79More on Photography
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that
include the photographer. Before proceeding, mount the
camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
1Press the I (E) button.
2Select E (Self-timer) mode.
Highlight E (Self-timer) and press J.
3Frame the photograph.
Self-Timer Mode
I (E) button
80 More on Photography
4Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus, and then press the
button the rest of the way down.
The
self-timer lamp will start to flash and a
beep will begin to sound.
Two
seconds before the photo is taken, the
lamp will stop flashing and the
beeping will become more rapid.
The
shutter will be released ten seconds
after the timer starts.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in
which the shutter can not be released.
To stop the timer
without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.
ACover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap (0322) when taking pictures without your eye
to the viewfinder. To attach the cap, remove the rubber eyecup (q)
and insert the cap as shown (w).
Hold the camera firmly when
removing the rubber eyecup.
Rubber eyecup Eyepiece cap
81More on Photography
AUsing the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the
flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash
and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (054).
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has
started.
ACustom Setting c3 (Self-Timer)
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the
number of shots taken, see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0241).
82 More on Photography
Focus can be adjusted automatically (see below) or manually
(095).
The user can also select the focus point for automatic or
manual focus (090) or use focus lock to focus to recompose
photographs after focusing (093).
Focus Mode
The following focus modes can be selected during viewfinder
photography:
Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in modes P, S, A, and M.
Focus
Option Description
AF-A Auto-servo AF
Camera automatically selects single-servo
autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-
servo autofocus if subject is moving.
Shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus.
AF-S Single-servo AF
For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Shutter can only be released if camera is able
to focus.
AF-C Continuous-
servo AF
For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
At default settings, shutter
can only be released if camera is able to focus,
but Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection, 0235) can be changed to allow the
shutter to be released at any time.
MF Manual focus Focus manually (095).
83More on Photography
The following focus modes are available in live view:
Note that full-time–servo AF is not available in U, ', and (
modes.
Option Description
AF-S Single-servo AF
For stationary subjects.
Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
You can also focus by touching your subject
in the monitor, in which case focus locks until
you lift your finger from the display to take
the photograph.
AF-F Full-time-servo
AF
For moving subjects.
Camera focuses
continuously until shutter-release button is
pressed.
Focus locks when shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
You can also focus
by touching your subject in the monitor, in
which case focus locks until you lift your
finger from the display to take the
photograph.
MF Manual focus Focus manually (095).
84 More on Photography
❚❚ Choosing the Focus Mode
Follow the steps below to choose the focus mode.
1Display focus mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
2Choose a focus mode.
Highlight a focus mode and press J.
Viewfinder photography Live view
Viewfinder photography Live view
P button
85More on Photography
APredictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A
mode during viewfinder photography, the camera will initiate
predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward the camera while
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
This allows the camera
to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be
when the shutter is released.
DContinuous-Servo Autofocus
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection; 0235) and the camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo
autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera gives higher priority to
focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.
AThe AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist
illuminator will light automatically to assist
the autofocus operation when the shutter-
release button is pressed halfway (some
restrictions apply; 0342).
Note that the
illuminator may become hot when used
multiple times in quick succession and will
turn off automatically to protect the lamp
after a period of continuous use.
Normal
function will resume after a brief pause.
AF-assist illuminator
86 More on Photography
AGetting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus.
In these cases, focus manually
(095) or use focus lock (093) to focus on another subject at the same
distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a
skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that
are small or lack variation in brightness.
87More on Photography
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
The
following options are available during viewfinder photography:
Option Description
cSingle-point AF
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected
manually; camera focuses on subject in
selected focus point only.
JDynamic-area AF
(9 points)
For non-stationary subjects.
In AF-A and AF-C
focus modes, user selects focus point using multi
selector (090), but camera will focus based
on information from surrounding focus points
if subject briefly leaves selected point.
Number of focus points varies with mode
selected:
9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is
time to compose photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a
track).
21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g.,
birds).
KDynamic-area AF
(21 points)
LDynamic-area AF
(39 points)
88 More on Photography
Note that d (dynamic-area) and f(3D-tracking) AF-area
modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus mode.
f3D-tracking
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus
point using multi selector (090).
If subject
moves after camera has focused, camera uses
3D-tracking to select new focus point and
keep focus locked on original subject while
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
eAuto-area AF Camera automatically detects subject and
selects focus point.
A3D-Tracking
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-
release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.
Note that when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are
stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the
desired results with subjects that are similar in color to the background
or that occupy a very small area of the frame.
Option Description
89More on Photography
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes
can be selected in live view:
Option Description
6Face-
priority AF
Use for portraits.
The
camera automatically
detects and focuses on
portrait subjects; the
selected subject is
indicated by a double
yellow border (if multiple
faces are detected, the camera will focus on the
closest subject; to choose a different subject, use the
multi selector).
If the camera can no longer detect
the subject (because, for example, the subject has
turned to face away from the camera), the border will
no longer be displayed.
7Wide-area
AF
Use for hand-held shots of
landscapes and other non-
portrait subjects.
8Normal-
area AF
Use for pin-point focus on
a selected spot in the
frame.
A tripod is
recommended.
90 More on Photography
Note that subject-tracking AF is not available in %, U, ', and 3
modes.
9Subject-
tracking AF
Use the multi selector to
position the focus point
over your subject and
press J to start tracking.
The focus point will track
the selected subject as it
moves through the frame.
To end tracking, press J again.
Note that the camera
may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly,
leave the frame or are obscured by other objects,
change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too
small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in
color or brightness to the background.
AManual Focus-Point Selection
The multi selector can be used to select the focus point.
Except in
subject-tracking AF, pressing J during focus-point selection selects
the center focus point.
In subject-tracking AF, pressing J starts
subject tracking instead.
Manual focus-point selection is not available
in auto-area AF.
Option Description
91More on Photography
❚❚ Choosing the AF-Area Mode
Follow the steps below to choose the AF-area mode.
1Display AF-area mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the
information display and press J.
2Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
Viewfinder photography Live view
Viewfinder photography Live view
AAF-Area Mode
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or
M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.
P button
92 More on Photography
DUsing Autofocus in Live View
The desired results may not be achieved with teleconverters (0305).
Note that in live view, autofocus is slower and the monitor may
brighten or darken while the camera focuses.
The focus point may
sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus.
The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations:
•The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
•The subject lacks contrast
•The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or other light
source that changes in brightness
•Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
•A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
•The subject appears smaller than the focus point
•The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
•The subject is moving
93More on Photography
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing
in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C focus modes (082), making it possible to
focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final
composition.
If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus
(086), focus lock can also be used to recompose the
photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject.
Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-
area mode (087).
1Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus.
Check that the in-focus indicator (I)
appears in the viewfinder (viewfinder photography) or that
the focus point has turned green (live view).
Viewfinder photography Live view
AAutoexposure Lock
Pressing the A(L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0130).
94 More on Photography
2Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes (viewfinder
photography): With the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (q), press the
A (L) button (w) to lock focus.
Focus will remain locked while the
A(L) button is pressed, even if you
later remove your finger from the
shutter-release button.
AF-S (viewfinder photography) and live view: Focus locks
automatically and remain locked until you remove your
finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be
locked by pressing the A (L) button (see above).
3Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
or keep the A (L) button pressed, allowing
several photographs in succession to be taken at the same
focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect.
If the subject moves,
focus again at the new distance.
Viewfinder photography Live view
Shutter-release button
A (L) button
95More on Photography
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or
does not produce the desired results (086).
1Select manual focus.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M mode
switch, slide the switch to M.
If the lens is not equipped a focus-mode switch, select MF
(manual focus) for Focus mode (082).
2Focus.
To focus manually, adjust the lens
focus ring until the image displayed
on the clear matte field in the
viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs
can be taken at any time, even when
the image is not in focus.
AAF-P Lenses
When an AF-P lens (0305) is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus
indicator (I) will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point
will flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus
ring in the current direction will not bring the subject into focus.
A-M mode switch M/A-M mode switch
96 More on Photography
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder focus indicator can be
used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of
the 39 focus points).
After positioning
the subject in the selected focus point,
press the shutter-release button halfway
and rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed.
Note that with the subjects listed on page 86, the in-
focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is
not in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
ASelecting Manual Focus with the Camera
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with
manual override) or A/M (autofocus with
manual override/AF priority), manual focus
can also be selected by setting the camera
focus mode to MF (manual focus; 082).
Focus can then be adjusted manually,
regardless of the mode selected with the
lens.
AFocal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your
subject and the camera, measure from
the focal plane mark (E) on the camera
body.
The distance between the lens
mounting flange and the focal plane is
46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
Focal plane mark
46.5
mm
97More on Photography
ALive View
Press the X button to zoom in for precise
focus in live view (053).
X button
98 More on Photography
Together, image quality and size determine how much space
each photograph occupies on the memory card.
Larger, higher
quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require
more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card (0387).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Image Quality and Size
Option File type Description
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
NEF/
JPEG
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG normal
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW) NEF
Raw data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing.
Settings such as
white balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
JPEG fine
JPEG
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
ANEF (RAW) + JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the
camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed.
When photographs
taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be
deleted.
99More on Photography
1Display image quality options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image quality in the
information display and press J.
2Choose a file type.
Highlight an option and press J.
ANEF (RAW) Images
Selecting NEF (RAW) for Image quality fixes Image size at Large
(0100).
White balance bracketing (0151), high dynamic range (HDR,
0138), and Date stamp (0243) are not available at image quality
settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.
AConverting NEF (RAW) Images to Other Formats
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (0280) or software such as
Capture NX-D (0210).
P button
Information display
100 More on Photography
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from #Large,
$Medium, or %Small:
1Display image size options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image size in the information
display and press J.
2Choose an image size.
Highlight an option and press J.
Image size Size (pixels) Print size (cm/in.)*
# Large 6000 × 4000 50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3
$ Medium 4496 × 3000 38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10
% Small 2992 × 2000 25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7
*Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi.
Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
P button
Information display
101More on Photography
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing
poorly lit or backlit subjects.
Auto Pop-up Modes
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, and ' modes, the built-in flash
automatically pops up and fires as required.
1Choose a flash mode.
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
2Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as
required when the shutter-
release button is pressed
halfway, and fire when a
photograph is taken.
If the
flash does not pop up
automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand.
Failure to
observe this precaution could damage the flash.
Using the Built-in Flash
M (Y) button Command dial Information display
+
102 More on Photography
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
•No (auto): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit,
the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway and fires as required.
Not available
in o mode.
•Njo (auto + red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The
flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the red-
eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.”
Not
available in o mode.
•Njr (auto slow sync + red-eye): As for auto with red-eye
reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to
capture background lighting.
Use for portraits taken at night
or under low light.
Available in o mode.
•Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to
capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under
low light.
Available in o mode.
•j (flash off): The flash does not fire.
AThe Information Display
Flash mode can also be selected in the
information display (06).
103More on Photography
Manual Pop-up Modes
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The
flash will not fire if it is not raised.
1Raise the flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the
flash.
2Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial
until the desired flash mode appears in the information
display.
3Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
M (Y) button Command dial Information display
M (Y) button
+
104 More on Photography
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
•N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.
•Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with
every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp
lights to help reduce “red-eye.”
Not available in 0 mode.
•Njp (slow sync + red-eye): As for “red-eye reduction”,
above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light.
Use
when you want to include background lighting in portraits.
Not available in modes S, M, and 0.
•Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background
lighting at night or under low light.
Use when you want to
capture both subject and background.
Not available in
modes S, M, and 0.
•Nt (rear-curtain + slow sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”,
below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to
capture background lighting at night or under low light.
Use
when you want to capture both subject and background.
Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
•Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the
shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light
sources as shown below at right.
Not available in modes P, A,
and 0.
Front-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync
105More on Photography
ALowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
AThe Built-in Flash
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash,
see page 312.
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
The flash has a
minimum range of about 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro
range of zoom lenses with a macro function.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it
has been used for several consecutive shots.
The flash can be used
again after a short pause.
106 More on Photography
AShutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in
flash is used:
Mode Shutter speed
i, p, n, s, w, 0, S, T, U, '1/200–1/60 s
k1/200–1/30 s
o1/200–1 s
P, S, A1/200–30 s
M1/200–30 s, Bulb, Time
AAperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
Aperture at ISO equivalent of Approximate range
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 mft
1.4 22.8 4 5.6 8 11 16 1.0–8.5 3ft 4in.–27ft 10in.
22.8 45.6 811 16 22 0.7–6.0 2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.
2.8 45.6 811 16 22 32 0.6–4.2 2ft–13ft 9in.
45.6 811 16 22 32 —0.6–3.0 2ft–9ft 10in.
5.6 811 16 22 32 — — 0.6–2.1 2ft–6ft 10in.
811 16 22 32 — — — 0.6–1.5 2ft–4ft 11in.
11 16 22 32 — — — — 0.6–1.1 2ft–3ft 7in.
16 22 32 — — — — — 0.6–0.7 2ft–2ft 4in.
107More on Photography
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available.
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less
light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter
speeds or smaller apertures.
Choosing Auto allows the camera
to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting
conditions; to use auto in P, S, A, and M modes, select Auto ISO
sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings item in the
shooting menu (0228).
1Display ISO sensitivity options.
Press the P button, then highlight
the current ISO sensitivity in the
information display and press J.
ISO Sensitivity
Mode ISO sensitivity
i, j, %Auto
P, S, A, M100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
Other shooting modes Auto; 100–25600 in steps of 1/3 EV
P button
Information display
108 More on Photography
2Choose an ISO sensitivity.
Highlight an option and press J.
109More on Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1Select Interval timer shooting.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in
the shooting menu and press 2 to
display interval timer settings.
Interval Timer Photography
DBefore Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor.
To ensure that
shooting starts at the desired time, check that the camera clock is set
correctly (0262).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure
the battery is fully charged.
110 More on Photography
2Adjust interval timer settings.
Choose a start option, interval, number of shots, and
exposure smoothing option.
•To choose a start option:
To start shooting immediately, select Now.
To start
shooting at a chosen date and time, select Choose start
day and start time, then choose the date and time and
press J.
•To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight Start options and
press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval (hours,
minutes, and seconds) and
press J.
111More on Photography
•To choose the number of intervals:
•To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on).
Highlight Number of times
and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals
and press J.
Highlight Exposure
smoothing and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
112 More on Photography
3Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
The first
shot will be taken at the specified
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now
was selected for Start options in Step
2.
Shooting will continue at the
selected interval until all shots have been taken; while
shooting is in progress, the memory card access lamp will
flash at regular intervals.
Note that because shutter speed
and the time needed to record the image to the memory card
may vary from shot to shot, intervals may be skipped if the
camera is still in the process of recording the previous
interval; choose an interval longer than the slowest
anticipated shutter speed.
If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of “Bulb” or
“Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M, the interval
is zero, or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning
will be displayed in the monitor.
113More on Photography
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused between intervals by
pressing J.
To resume shooting:
Starting Now
Starting at a Specified Time
❚❚ Ending Interval Timer Shooting
To end interval timer photography and resume normal shooting
before all the photos are taken, pause shooting and select Off in
the interval timer menu.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
For Start options,
highlight Choose start
day and start time
and press 2.
Choose a starting date
and time and press J.
Highlight Restart and
press J.
114 More on Photography
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph for the previous interval has yet to
be taken, the memory card is full, or the camera is unable to
focus (AF-S, AF-A with single-servo AF selected, or AF-C with Focus
selected for Custom Setting a1 AF-C priority selection; note
that the camera focuses again before each shot).
Shooting will
resume with the next interval.
DOut of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken.
Resume shooting (0113) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
ACover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an
optional eyepiece cap (0322) before taking pictures without your eye
to the viewfinder (080).
AOther Settings
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography.
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera takes one
photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise will be reduced.
Bracketing (0151) and high dynamic range (HDR; 0138) can not be
used.
AInterrupting Interval Timer Photography
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the
mode dial to a new setting.
Returning the monitor to the storage
position does not interrupt interval timer shooting.
115More on Photography
The camera settings listed below
and on page 117 can be restored
to default values by holding the
G and R buttons down
together for more than two
seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot).
The
information display turns off briefly while settings are reset.
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Information Display
Restoring Default Settings
Option Default 0
Image quality JPEG normal 98
Image size Large 100
Auto bracketing
P, S, A, MOff 151
HDR (high dynamic range)
P, S, A, MOff 138
Active D-Lighting
P, S, A, MAuto 136
White balance
P, S, A, MAuto1140
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M100 107
Other shooting modes Auto
Picture Control settings
P, S, A, MUnmodified 2158
1 Fine-tuning is also reset.
2 Current Picture Control only.
G button R button
116 More on Photography
Focus mode
Viewfinder
Shooting modes other than %AF-A 82
Live view/movie AF-S 83
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3Single-point AF
87
m, wDynamic-area AF (39 points)
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s, t, u, v, y, z, S,
T, U, ', 3, P, S, A, MAuto-area AF
Live view/movie
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x, y, zFace-priority AF
89
m, r, w, %, S, T, U, ', 3, 1, 2, 3, P, S,
A, MWide-area AF
n, 0Normal-area AF
Metering
P, S, A, MMatrix metering 128
Flash mode
i, k, p, n, w, S, T, 'Auto
102,
104
oAuto slow sync
sAuto+red-eye reduction
UFlash off
P, S, A, MFill flash
Flash compensation
h, P, S, A, MOff 134
Exposure compensation
h, %, P, S, A, MOff 132
Option Default 0
117More on Photography
❚❚ Other Settings
Option Default 0
NEF (RAW) recording 14-bit 227
Exposure delay mode Off 241
Release mode
m, wContinuous H 75
Other shooting modes Single frame
Focus point Center 90
AE/AF lock hold
Shooting modes other than i and jOff 254
Flexible program
POff 120
Special effects mode
U
Outlines 70
'
Vividness 0 71
Vignetting 0
(
Orientation Landscape 72
Width Normal
3
Color Off 73
Color range 3
118 P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of
control over shutter speed and aperture:
Shutter Speed and Aperture
Mode Description
PProgrammed auto
(0119)
Recommended for snapshots and in other
situations in which there is little time to
adjust camera settings.
Camera sets
shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure.
SShutter-priority auto
(0121)
Use to freeze or blur motion.
User chooses
shutter speed; camera selects aperture for
best results.
AAperture-priority auto
(0122)
Use to blur background or bring both
foreground and background into focus.
User chooses aperture; camera selects
shutter speed for best results.
MManual (0123)
User controls both shutter speed and
aperture.
Set shutter speed to “Bulb” or
“Time” for long time-exposures.
119P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
This mode is recommended
for snapshots or whenever
you want to leave the camera
in charge of shutter speed and
aperture.
The camera
automatically adjusts shutter
speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most
situations.
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the mode
dial to P.
Mode dial
120 P, S, A, and M Modes
AFlexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can
be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”).
Rotate
the dial right for large apertures (low f-numbers) and fast shutter
speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter
speeds.
All combinations produce the same exposure.
Rotate right to blur background details or
freeze motion.
Command dial
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur
motion.
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)
indicator appears in the viewfinder and
information display.
To restore default
shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate
the command dial until the indicator is no
longer displayed, choose another mode, or
turn the camera off.
121P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter
speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest
motion by blurring moving objects.
The camera automatically
adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.
To choose a shutter speed:
1Rotate the mode dial to S.
2Choose a shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose the desired shutter
speed: rotate right for faster speeds, left for slower speeds.
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1/1600 s)
freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur
motion.
Mode dial
Command dial
122 P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field
(the distance in front of and behind the main subject that
appears to be in focus).
The camera automatically adjusts
shutter speed for optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture:
1Rotate the mode dial to A.
2Choose an aperture.
Rotate the command dial left for larger apertures (lower f-
numbers), right for smaller apertures (higher f-numbers).
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g.
f/5.6) blur details in front of and
behind the main subject.
Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g.
f/22) bring the foreground and
background into focus.
Mode dial
Command dial
123P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode M (Manual)
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.
Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks
(0125).
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
Mode dial
124 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter
speed and aperture.
Shutter speed is selected by rotating the
command dial (right for faster speeds, left for slower).
To
adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button pressed while
rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).
Shutter speed
Command dial
Aperture
E (N) button Command dial
AThe Exposure Indicator
If a CPU lens is attached (0305) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb”
or “Time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and
information display shows whether the photograph would be under-
or over-exposed at current settings.
Optimal exposure Underexposed by 1/3EV Overexposed by over 2 EV
125P, S, A, and M Modes
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter
speeds for long time-exposures
of moving lights, the stars, night
scenery, or fireworks.
•Bulb (A): The shutter
remains open while the
shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
To
prevent blur, use a tripod or an
optional wireless remote controller (0323) or remote cord
(0324).
•Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button
on the camera or on a remote cord or wireless remote
controller.
The shutter remains open until the button is
pressed a second time.
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on
a stable, level surface.
To prevent light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with
exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with
your hand or other objects such as an optional eyepiece cap
(0322) before taking pictures without your eye to the
viewfinder (080).
To prevent loss of power before the exposure
is complete, use a fully charged battery.
Note that noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in
long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by
choosing On for Long exposure NR in the shooting menu
(0230).
Shutter speed: A (35-second
exposure; 0126)
Aperture: f/25
126 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Bulb
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
2Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial to choose a
shutter speed of Bulb (A).
3Take the photograph.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera, optional wireless remote controller or remote cord
all the way down.
Take your finger from the shutter-release
button when the exposure is complete.
Mode dial
Command dial
127P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Time
1Rotate the mode dial to M.
2Choose the shutter speed.
Rotate the command dial left to
choose a shutter speed of “Time” (&).
3Open the shutter.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or a remote cord or wireless remote controller all the
way down.
4Close the shutter.
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3.
Mode dial
Command dial
128 P, S, A, and M Modes
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure.
1Display metering options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current metering method in the
information display and press J.
Exposure
Method Description
LMatrix metering
Produces natural results in most situations.
The
camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets
exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance.
MCenter-weighted
metering
Classic meter for portraits.
Camera meters entire
frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.
Recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
NSpot metering
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be
correctly exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker.
Camera meters current
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.
P button
Information display
129P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose a metering method.
Highlight an option and press J.
ASpot Metering
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder
photography (087), the camera will meter the center focus point.
130 P, S, A, and M Modes
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
M(Center-weighted metering) and N(Spot metering) to
meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is not available in
i or j mode.
1Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutter-
release button halfway.
With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway and the subject positioned in
the focus point, press the A (L)
button to lock exposure.
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder
and the monitor.
2Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the A (L) button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Shutter-release
button
A (L) button
131P, S, A, and M Modes
AAdjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode Setting
Programmed auto Shutter speed and aperture
(flexible program; 0120)
Shutter-priority auto Shutter speed
Aperture-priority auto Aperture
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is
in effect.
132 P, S, A, and M Modes
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker
(0358).
In general, positive values make the subject brighter
while negative values make it darker.
It is most effective when
used with M(Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot
metering) (0128).
To choose a value for exposure compensation, keep the E (N)
button pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired
value is selected in the viewfinder or information display.
–1 EV No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
E (N) button Command dial Information display
–0.3 EV +2 EV
+
133P, S, A, and M Modes
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.
Except in h and % modes, exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h and % modes, exposure compensation will be reset when
another mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
AThe Information Display
Exposure compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
(012).
AMode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator.
AUsing a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background
exposure and flash level.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of
shots, see page 151.
134 P, S, A, and M Modes
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level
suggested by the camera, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (0360).
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons pressed and rotate the
command dial until the desired value is selected in the
viewfinder or information display.
In general, positive values
make the main subject seem brighter while negative values
make it seem darker.
Normal flash output can be restored by
setting flash compensation to ±0.
Except in h mode, flash
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off (in
h mode, flash compensation will be reset when another
mode is selected or the camera is turned off).
M (Y) button
Command dial Information display
E (N) button
–0.3 EV +1 EV
+
135P, S, A, and M Modes
AThe Information Display
Flash compensation options can also be
accessed from the information display
(012).
AOptional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that
support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 315).
The
flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to
the flash compensation selected with the camera.
136 P, S, A, and M Modes
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast.
Use for high
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day.
Active D-Lighting is not
recommended in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective
when used with L(Matrix metering; 0128).
1Display Active D-Lighting options.
Press the P button, then highlight
Active D-Lighting in the information
display and press J.
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
Active D-Lighting: ! Off Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
P button
Information display
137P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J
(0359).
DActive D-Lighting
With some subjects, you may notice uneven shading, shadows around
bright objects, or halos around dark objects.
Active D-Lighting is not
available with movies.
A“Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the
dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu
(0285) brightens shadows in images after shooting.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a
series of shots, see page 151.
138 P, S, A, and M Modes
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a
single image that captures a wide range of tones from shadows
to highlights, even with high-contrast subjects.
HDR is most
effective when used with L(Matrix metering) (0128).
It can
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
While HDR is in effect,
the flash can not be used and continuous shooting is not
available.
1Display HDR (high dynamic range)
options.
Press the P button, then highlight
HDR (high dynamic range) in the
information display and press J.
First exposure (darker) Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR image
+
P button
Information display
139P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose an option.
Highlight vAuto, 2Extra high,
SHigh, TNormal, ULow, or
6Off and press J.
When an option other than 6Off is
selected, u will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
3Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
“lu”
will flash in the viewfinder while the images are combined; no
photographs can be taken until recording is complete.
HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken; to turn
off HDR before shooting, rotate the mode dial to a setting
other than P, S, A, or M.
DFraming HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out.
The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting.
Use
of a tripod is recommended.
Depending on the scene, the effect may
not be visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos
may appear around dark objects.
Uneven shading may be visible with
some subjects.
140 P, S, A, and M Modes
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source.
Auto white balance is recommended for most
light sources; other values can be selected if necessary
according to the type of source:
1Display white balance options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current white balance setting in the
information display and press J.
White Balance
Option Description
vAuto Automatic white balance adjustment.
Recommended in most situations.
JIncandescent Use under incandescent lighting.
IFluorescent Use with the light sources listed on page 141.
HDirect sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
NFlash Use with the flash.
GCloudy Use in daylight under overcast skies.
MShade Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
LPreset manual Measure white balance or copy white balance
from existing photo (0145).
P button
Information display
141P, S, A, and M Modes
2Choose a white balance option.
Highlight an option and press J.
AThe Shooting Menu
White balance can be selected using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
(0223), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0143) or measure a value
for preset white balance (0145).
The IFluorescent option in the White
balance menu can be used to select the
light source from the bulb types shown at
right.
ATouch Menu Navigation
Tap an option in the white balance menu once to highlight it and again
to select it and either display a menu of bulb types (IFluorescent) or
return to the shooting menu.
142 P, S, A, and M Modes
AColor Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions.
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths.
While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red.
Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors “Cooler” (bluer) colors
qI (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
wJ (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K
eI (white fluorescent): 3700 K
rI (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
tI (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
yH (direct sunlight): 5200 K
uN (flash): 5400 K
iG (cloudy): 6000 K
oI (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
!0 I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
!1 M (shade): 8000 K
Note: All figures are approximate.
ABracketing
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a
series of shots, see page 151.
3000 4000 5000 6000 8000 10000 [ K ]
q w retyui o!0 !1
143P, S, A, and M Modes
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations
in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color
cast into an image.
White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu.
1Display fine-tuning options.
Highlight a white balance option and
press 2 (if Fluorescent is selected,
highlight the desired lighting type
and press 2; note that fine-tuning is
not available with Preset manual).
2Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance.
White balance can be
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25.
The
horizontal (amber-blue) axis
corresponds to color temperature,
while the vertical (green-magenta)
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters.
The horizontal axis is ruled in
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J.
Coordinates
Adjustment
144 P, S, A, and M Modes
AWhite Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute.
For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (incandescent) is selected will make photographs slightly “colder”
but will not actually make them blue.
ATouch Fine-Tuning
To fine-tune an option in the white balance menu using the touch
screen, tap the option once to highlight it and then tap the 2 Adjust
button to view the fine-tuning display.
To choose a value, tap the
coordinate display or the u, v, x, or y icons.
Tap 0 OK to return to the
shooting menu once white balance has been adjusted to your
satisfaction.
A“Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures.
For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K.
Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters.
E.g.:
•4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
•7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
145P, S, A, and M Modes
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast.
Two methods are available
for setting preset white balance:
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that
will be used in the final photograph.
2Display white balance options.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display
white balance options.
Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
3Select Measure.
Highlight Measure and press 2.
Method Description
Measure
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that
will be used in final photo and white balance measured by
camera (see below).
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card
(0149).
146 P, S, A, and M Modes
4Select Ye s .
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
The camera will enter preset
measurement mode.
When the camera is ready to measure
white balance, a flashing D (L) will
appear in the viewfinder and
information display.
5Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing,
frame the reference object so that it
fills the viewfinder and press the
shutter-release button all the way down.
No photograph will
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even
when the camera is not in focus.
147P, S, A, and M Modes
6Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, the message
shown at right will be displayed and
a will flash in the viewfinder and the
camera will return to shooting mode.
To return to shooting mode
immediately, press the shutter-release
button halfway.
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance.
A message will appear
in the information display and a
flashing ba will appear in the
viewfinder.
Return to Step 5 and
measure white balance again.
148 P, S, A, and M Modes
DMeasuring Preset White Balance
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting
c2 (Auto off timers; 0240).
DPreset White Balance
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time;
the existing value will be replaced when a new value is measured.
Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that the
exposure indicator shows ±0 (0124).
AOther Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset
white balance in the information display (0140), press J for a few
seconds.
If white balance has been assigned to the Fn button (0252),
white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by keeping
the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white
balance with the Fn button and command dial.
AGray Panels
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray
panel.
149P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a
photograph on the memory card.
1Select Preset manual.
Highlight White balance in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display
white balance options.
Highlight
Preset manual and press 2.
2Select Use photo.
Highlight Use photo and press 2.
3Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2
(to skip the remaining steps and use
the image last selected for preset
white balance, select This image).
4Choose a folder.
Highlight the folder containing the
source image and press 2.
150 P, S, A, and M Modes
5Highlight the source image.
To view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold the X button.
6Copy white balance.
Press J to set preset white balance to the white balance
value for the highlighted photograph.
151P, S, A, and M Modes
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or
Active D-Lighting (ADL) settings slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value.
Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
1Choose a bracketing option.
Highlight e2 (Auto bracketing set) in
the Custom Settings menu and press
2.
Highlight the desired bracketing type
and press J.
Bracketing
Option Description
kAE bracketing
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.
Shot 1:
unmodified
Shot 2: exposure
reduced
Shot 3: exposure
increased
mWB bracketing
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates
three images, each with a different white balance.
Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).
!ADL bracketing Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and
another at the current Active D-Lighting setting.
152 P, S, A, and M Modes
2Display bracketing options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current bracketing setting and press
J.
3Select a bracketing increment.
Highlight a bracketing increment and
press J. Choose from values between
0.3 and 2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3
(WB bracketing), or select ADL (ADL
bracketing).
P button
Information display
153P, S, A, and M Modes
4Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
AE bracketing: The camera will vary
exposure with each shot.
The first
shot will be taken at the value currently selected for exposure
compensation.
The bracketing increment will be subtracted
from the current value in the second shot and added in the
third shot, “bracketing” the current value.
The modified
values are reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and
aperture.
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies,
one at the current white balance setting, one with increased
amber, and one with increased blue.
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is
taken with Active D-Lighting off, the second at the current
Active D-Lighting setting (0136; if Active D-Lighting is off,
the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set to
Auto).
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release
modes, shooting will pause after each bracketing cycle.
If the
camera is turned off before all shots in the bracketing sequence
have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in
the sequence when the camera is turned on.
154 P, S, A, and M Modes
AThe Bracketing Progress Indicator
During AE bracketing, a bar is removed
from the bracketing progress indicator
with each shot (v>w>x).
During ADL bracketing, the setting that
will be used for the next shot is underlined
in the information display.
ADisabling Bracketing
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in
Step 3 (0152).
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
button reset (0115).
To cancel bracketing before all frames have been
recorded, rotate the mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.
AExposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M).
If auto
ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the camera will automatically vary
ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera
exposure system are exceeded.
155P, S, A, and M Modes
Picture Controls are preset combinations of image processing
settings that include sharpening, clarity, contrast, brightness,
saturation, and hue.
You can select a Picture Control to match
the scene or customize settings to suit your creative intent.
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Picture Controls
Option Description
QStandard Recommended for most situations, this option uses
standard processing for balanced results.
RNeutral
A good choice for photographs that will later be
processed or retouched, this option uses minimal
processing for natural results.
SVivid
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize
primary colors.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid,
photoprint effect.
TMonochrome Take monochrome photographs.
ePortrait Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
fLandscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
qFlat
Choose for photographs that will later be
extensively processed or retouched.
Details are
preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights
to shadows.
156 P, S, A, and M Modes
1Display Picture Control options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current Picture Control and press J.
2Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a Picture Control and press
J.
ATouch Menu Navigation
Picture Controls can also be selected in the shooting menu (0223).
When choosing an option from the Set Picture Control menu using
the touch screen (025), tap the option once to highlight it and again
to select it.
P button
Information display
157P, S, A, and M Modes
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0161) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent.
Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1Select a Picture Control.
Highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
and press 2.
2Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25 (0158).
Repeat
this step until all settings have been adjusted, or select a
preset combination of settings by using the multi selector to
choose Quick adjust.
Default settings can be restored by
pressing the O button.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J.
Picture Controls that have been
modified from default settings are
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).
158 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option Description
Quick adjust
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected
Picture Control (note that this resets all manual
adjustments).
Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, Flat, or custom Picture Controls
(0161).
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Sharpening
Control the sharpness of outlines.
Select A to
adjust sharpening automatically according to
the type of scene.
Clarity
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the
camera adjust clarity automatically.
Depending on the scene, shadows may appear
around bright objects or halos may appear
around dark objects at some settings.
Clarity is
not applied to movies.
Contrast Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the
camera adjust contrast automatically.
Brightness Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail
in highlights or shadows.
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
Saturation
Control the vividness of colors.
Select A to
adjust saturation automatically according to
the type of scene.
Hue Adjust hue.
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs (0160).
Toning Choose the tint used in monochrome
photographs (0160).
159P, S, A, and M Modes
D“A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
ASwitching Between Manual and Auto
Press the X button to switch back and forth
between manual and auto (A) settings for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.
ACustom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
shooting menu (0161) and can be saved to a memory card for sharing
among other cameras of the same model and compatible software
(0163).
APrevious Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting.
Use this as
a reference when adjusting settings.
ACustom Picture Control Options
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
AUsing the Touch Screen
To use the touch screen to modify a Picture
Control in the Set Picture Control menu,
tap the Picture Control once to highlight it
and then tap the 2 Adjust button to view
the menu shown in Step 2 on page 157.
Tap
a parameter once to highlight it and again to
display options, then use the on-screen
controls to choose a value (the multi selector can not be used).
Note
that the touch screen can only be used for this purpose if Enable is
selected for Touch controls.
160 P, S, A, and M Modes
AFilter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option Description
YYellow Enhances contrast.
Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.
Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
more contrast than orange.
OOrange
RRed
GGreen Softens skin tones.
Can be used for portraits.
AToning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options.
Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation in increments of 1, or rotate the
command dial to choose a value in
increments of 0.25.
Saturation control is not
available when B&W (black-and-white) is
selected.
ATouch-Screen Character Entry
To type, tap the letters in the keyboard area (you can select letters by
sliding a finger over the screen: the letters are highlighted as you touch
them and are not entered in the text area until you lift your finger).
To
position the cursor, tap directly in the text area or tap the x or y
buttons.
161P, S, A, and M Modes
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified
and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1Select Manage Picture Control.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in
the shooting menu and press 2.
2Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control
and press 2, or press J to proceed to
Step 5 to save a copy of the
highlighted Picture Control without
further modification.
4Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 158 for more information.
To abandon any changes and start
over from default settings, press the O
button.
Press J when settings are
complete.
162 P, S, A, and M Modes
5Select a destination.
Highlight a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
6Name the Picture Control.
By default, new Picture Controls are
named by adding a two-digit number
(assigned automatically) to the name
of the existing Picture Control; to use
the default name, proceed to Step 7.
To move the cursor in the name area,
rotate the command dial.
To enter a
new letter at the current cursor
position, use the multi selector to highlight the desired
character in the keyboard area and press J.
To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long.
Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
7Press X.
Press X to save changes and exit.
The
new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
Name area
Keyboard area
163P, S, A, and M Modes
AManage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the
Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu.
AManage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used
to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer
needed.
AThe Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which
the custom Picture Control is based is
indicated by an icon in the top right corner
of the edit display.
ASharing Custom Picture Controls
The Load/save item in the Manage Picture
Control menu offers the options listed
below.
Use these options to copy custom
Picture Controls to and from memory cards.
Once copied to memory cards, Picture
Controls can be used with other cameras or
compatible software.
•Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to
custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and name
them as desired.
•Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the
memory card.
•Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from the
camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
Original
Picture Control icon
164 Recording and Viewing Movies
Recording and Viewing Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be
displayed in the monitor.
2Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus.
Note that the number of subjects that
can be detected in face-priority AF
drops during movie recording.
Recording Movies
DThe 0 Icon
A 0 icon (011) indicates that movies
can not be recorded.
ABefore Recording
If you are using a type E or PC-E NIKKOR
lens (0305, 307), you can choose the
aperture for exposure modes A and M
during live view (0122, 123).
Live view switch
165Recording and Viewing Movies
3Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording.
A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor.
Sound is recorded via the
built-in microphone (02); be careful
not to obstruct the microphone
during recording.
Except in i and j
modes, exposure can be locked by
pressing the A (L) button (0130)
or (in h, P, S, A, and % modes)
altered by up to ±3 EV in steps of 1
/
3EV
by pressing the E (N) button and
rotating the command dial (0132;
note that depending on the
brightness of the subject, changes to
exposure may have no visible effect).
4End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.
Recording will end automatically when the maximum length
is reached, the memory card is full, another mode is selected,
or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end
recording on televisions or other external displays).
5End live view.
Rotate the live view switch to end live view.
Movie-record button
Time remaining
Recording indicator
166 Recording and Viewing Movies
The P Button
When movie indicators are displayed by
pressing the R button in live view mode,
the following settings can be accessed by
pressing the P button:
•Movie frame size/quality (0168)
•Microphone (0169)
•White balance (0140)
•Exposure compensation (0132) *
•Picture Control (0155)
•Wind noise reduction (0169)
•Focus mode (082)
•AF-area mode (087)
* ISO sensitivity will be displayed in place of
exposure compensation if On is selected for Movie settings > Manual
movie settings (0169) in mode M.
ATaking Photographs During Movie Recording
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press
the shutter-release button all the way down and hold it in this position
until the shutter is released.
The touch shutter (019) can not be used
to take photos during movie recording.
AMaximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum
recording times, see page 168); note that depending on memory card
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached (0324).
P button
167Recording and Viewing Movies
DRecording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with
subjects that are in motion, particularly if the camera is panned
horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high speed through
frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see Flicker
reduction; 0268).
Jagged edges, color fringing, moire, and bright
spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in some
areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light
sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other
bright, momentary light source. Avoid pointing the camera at the sun
or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone during recording. Note that the built-in microphone may
record lens noise during autofocus and vibration reduction.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.
Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On
is selected for Manual movie settings (0169) and the camera is in
mode M.
168 Recording and Viewing Movies
Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu (0170) to
adjust the following settings.
•Frame size/frame rate and Movie quality: The maximum
length varies with the options selected.
Movie quality Frame size/frame rate 1 Maximum length 2
High quality
L 1920×1080; 60p 10 min.
M 1920×1080; 50p
N 1920×1080; 30p
20 min.
O 1920×1080; 25p
P 1920×1080; 24p
Q 1280× 720; 60p
R 1280× 720; 50p
Normal
t 1920×1080; 60p 20 min.
u 1920×1080; 50p
r 1920×1080; 30p
29 min. 59 s
s 1920×1080; 25p
k 1920×1080; 24p
l 1280× 720; 60p
o 1280× 720; 50p
1Listed value.
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and
23.976 fps respectively.
2 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.
169Recording and Viewing Movies
•Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional stereo
microphones (0170, 323) on or off or adjust microphone
sensitivity.
Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to
select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual
sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.
•Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter
for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are
unaffected; 0170, 323), reducing noise produced by wind
blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may
also be affected).
Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo
microphones can be enabled or disabled using microphone
controls.
•Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the
camera is in mode M.
Shutter speed can be set to values as
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for
50p, and 1/60 s for 60p.
If shutter speed is not in this range
when live view starts, it will automatically be set to a
supported value, and remain at this value when live view
ends.
Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically
when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu (0228).
170 Recording and Viewing Movies
1Select Movie settings.
Highlight Movie settings in the
shooting menu and press 2.
2Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item and press
2, then highlight an option and press
J.
AUsing an External Microphone
Optional stereo microphones can be used to reduce noise caused by
lens vibration being recorded during autofocus.
AHDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the video
device will display the view through the lens.
If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the
setup menu (0219) before shooting in live view.
171Recording and Viewing Movies
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie using the options currently
selected for Frame size/frame rate and Movie quality under
Movie settings in the shooting menu (0168).
1Select Time-lapse movie.
Highlight Time-lapse movie in the
shooting menu and press 2 to display
time-lapse movie settings.
Time-Lapse Movies
ABefore Shooting
Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop; before shooting a
time-lapse movie, take a test shot at current settings and view the
results in the monitor.
For consistent coloration, choose a white
balance setting other than auto (0140).
Use of a tripod is recommended.
Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an
optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery.
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with
photographs and exposure, cover the viewfinder with your hand or
other object or attach the optional viewfinder eyepiece cap (080).
172 Recording and Viewing Movies
2Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Choose an interval, total shooting time, and exposure
smoothing option.
•To choose the interval between frames:
•To choose the total shooting time:
Highlight Interval and
press 2.
Choose an interval longer than
the slowest anticipated shutter
speed (minutes and seconds)
and press J.
Highlight Shooting time and
press 2.
Choose shooting time (up to
7hours 59minutes) and
press J.
173Recording and Viewing Movies
•To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure in
modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only
takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is
enabled in the shooting menu).
3Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J.
Shooting starts after about 3 s.
The
camera takes photographs at the
selected interval for the selected
shooting time.
When complete, time-
lapse movies are recorded to the memory card.
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
ACalculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final
movie can be calculated by dividing the
shooting time by the interval and rounding
up.
The length of the final movie can then
be calculated by dividing the number of
shots by the frame rate selected for Frame
size/frame rate in the shooting menu
(0168).
A 48 frame movie recorded at
1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be
about two seconds long.
The maximum
length for time-lapse movies is 20 minutes.
Length recorded/
maximum length
Frame size/frame rate
Memory card
indicator
174 Recording and Viewing Movies
❚❚ Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J
between frames or immediately after a frame is recorded.
A
movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where
shooting ended.
Note that if the power source is removed or
disconnected or the destination memory card is ejected, no
movie will be recorded and shooting will end without a beep
being sounded.
❚❚ No Photograph
The camera will skip the current frame if it is unable to focus for
eight seconds or more in AF-S or when single-servo AF is selected
in AF-A or Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection) in AF-C (note that the camera focuses again before
each shot).
Shooting will resume with the next frame.
DTime-Lapse Movies
Time-lapse is not available in special effects mode (065), during live
view (09, 47) or movie recording (0164), at a shutter speed of A
or & (0125), or when the self-timer (079), bracketing (0151), High
Dynamic Range (HDR, 0138), or interval timer photography (0109)
is active.
Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to
record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, the
interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot
may vary.
Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie can not be
recorded at current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the
interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than the
shooting time).
Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed
or HDMI cable is connected.
A movie will be created from the frames
shot to the point where shooting ended.
175Recording and Viewing Movies
ADuring Shooting
The memory card access lamp lights while
shooting is in progress.
A message will
appear in the information display if the R
button is pressed between shots.
The
standby timer does not turn off, regardless
of the option selected for Custom Setting c2
(Auto off timers) > Standby timer.
AImage Review
The K button can not be used to view pictures while shooting is in
progress.
ARelease Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot
at each interval.
AOpening and Closing the Monitor
Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt time-
lapse movie recording.
176 Recording and Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0184).
Tap the a icon in the monitor or press J to start playback; your
current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.
The following operations can be performed:
Viewing Movies
1 icon Length
Current position/
total length Volume
1
a icon Movie progress bar Guide
To Use Description
Pause Pause playback.
Play Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Advance/
rewind
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of
monitor, last frame by i).
If playback is
paused, movie rewinds or advances one
frame at a time; hold for continuous rewind
or advance.
Skip 10 s Rotate the command dial one stop to skip
ahead or back 10 s.
177Recording and Viewing Movies
Adjust
volume X/W (Q)Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to
decrease.
Return to
full-frame
playback
K / Press K or 1 to exit to full-frame playback.
To Use Description
178 Recording and Viewing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1Display a movie full frame.
2Pause the movie on the new
opening frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 176, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause and
pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the
command dial to locate the desired
frame.
Your approximate position in
the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar.
Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.
Editing Movies
Option Description
fChoose start/end point Create a copy from which unwanted
footage has been removed.
gSave selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Movie progress bar
179Recording and Viewing Movies
3Select Choose start/end point.
Press the P button, then highlight
Choose start/end point and press 2.
4Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
P button
180 Recording and Viewing Movies
5Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the command dial one stop).
6Choose the end point.
Press A (L) to switch from the start point (w) to the end
point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as
described in Step 5.
The frames after the selected frame will
be removed when you save the copy in Step 9.
7Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
8Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1).
To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described on the foregoing pages,
highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy, proceed to
Step 9.
End point
181Recording and Viewing Movies
9Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file.
To
replace the original movie file with
the edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
DTrimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long.
The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
ARemoving Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to Step
7 without pressing the A (L) button in Step 6.
To remove only the
closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing frame,
and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the A (L) button in Step 6.
182 Recording and Viewing Movies
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described on
page 176, pressing J to start and
resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2Choose Save selected frame.
Press the P button, then highlight
Save selected frame and press 2.
3Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the
current frame.
P button
183Recording and Viewing Movies
4Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J to create a
fine-quality (098) JPEG copy of the
selected frame.
ASave Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched.
JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information (0188).
184 Playback and Deletion
Playback and Deletion
To play photographs back, press the K button.
The most recent
photograph will be displayed in the monitor.
Full-Frame Playback
K button
To Use Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in
order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View additional
photo info
Change photo info displayed
(0188).
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Play movie
If current picture is marked with 1
icon to show that it is a movie,
pressing J starts movie playback
(0176).
185Playback and Deletion
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press
the W (Q) button.
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Highlight images Use multi selector or command dial
to highlight pictures.
View highlighted
image
Press J to display the highlighted
image full frame.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
W (Q)
X
W (Q)
X
186 Playback and Deletion
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button
when 80 images are displayed.
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the
cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:
Date list
Thumbnail list
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail
playback
Calendar
playback
To Use Description
Toggle between
date list and
thumbnail list
W (Q)Press W (Q) or J button in date list
to place cursor in thumbnail list.
Press W (Q) again to return to date
list.
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom
in on highlighted
photo
X
•Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.
•Thumbnail list: Press and hold X
button to zoom in on highlighted
picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
•Date list: Highlight date.
•Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
•Thumbnail list: View highlighted
picture.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
W (Q)
X
W (Q)
X
187Playback and Deletion
The P Button
Pressing the P button in full-frame,
thumbnail, or calendar playback displays
the options listed below.
Highlight items
and press 2 to view options.
•Rating: Rate the current picture
(0201).
•Retouch (photographs only): Use the
options in the retouch menu (0277)
to create a retouched copy of the
current photograph.
•Edit movie (movies only): Edit movies
using the options in the edit movie
menu (0178).
Movies can also be
edited by pressing the P button when movie playback is
paused.
•Select to send to smart device/deselect (photographs only): Select
photos for upload to a smart device.
To exit the P-button menu and return to playback, press the P
button again.
P button
188 Playback and Deletion
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below.
Note that “image only”, shooting
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback
display options (0221).
Location data are only displayed if
embedded in the picture (0269).
Photo Information
File information None (image only) Overview
Highlights Location data
RGB histogram Shooting data
189Playback and Deletion
❚❚ File Information
❚❚ Highlights*
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).
10
11
98
5
1 2 3 4
7
6
1Protect status.......................... 200
2Retouch indicator ................. 279
3Upload marking..................... 203
4Frame number/total number of
images
5File name.................................. 227
6Image quality ............................98
7Image size................................100
8Time of recording...........40, 262
9Date of recording ...........40, 262
10 Folder name ............................225
11 Rating ........................................201
2
1
1Folder number—frame
number.................................. 225
2Image highlights
190 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ RGB Histogram
5
1
2
4
3
1Histogram (RGB channel).
In all
histograms, horizontal axis
gives pixel brightness,
vertical axis number of pixels.
2Histogram (red channel)
3Histogram (green channel)
4Histogram (blue channel)
5White balance ........................ 140
White balance
fine-tuning....................... 143
Preset manual ..................... 145
APlayback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X.
Use the X
and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and
scroll the image with the multi selector.
The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the monitor.
191Playback and Deletion
AHistograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects
with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of
tones will be relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left.
Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
192 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Shooting Data
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
* Items displayed vary with Picture Control selected.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1Metering .................................. 128
Shutter speed......................... 118
Aperture................................... 118
2Shooting
mode................. 47, 58, 65, 118
ISO sensitivity 1...................... 107
3Exposure compensation .... 132
4Focal length ............................ 314
5Lens data
6Focus mode................................82
Lens VR (vibration
reduction) 2................... 32, 232
7Flash type........................246, 315
Commander mode 2............. 246
8Flash mode.....................102, 104
9Flash control ........................... 246
Flash compensation............. 134
10 Camera name
11
12
13
11 White balance........................ 140
White balance
fine-tuning ...................... 143
Preset manual..................... 145
12 Color space..............................230
13 Picture Control *..................... 155
193Playback and Deletion
* Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the photograph using the
Copyright information option in the setup menu.
14
15
16
18
17
19
14 High ISO noise reduction ... 231
Long exposure noise
reduction.............................. 230
15 Active D-Lighting.................. 136
16 HDR (high dynamic
range)..................................... 138
17 Vignette control.....................231
18 Retouch history......................277
19 Image comment....................260
20
21
20 Name of photographer *..... 261 21 Copyright holder *.................261
194 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Overview Data
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
8
15
9
22
28
27
1314 12 11 10
1342
6
7
5
26 25 24 23
16 17 1819 20 21
1Frame number/total number of
images
2Upload marking .................... 203
3Protect status ......................... 200
4Camera name
5Retouch indicator................. 279
6Image comment
indicator ............................... 260
7Location data indicator ...... 269
8Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the
image (0 191).
9Image quality ............................98
10 Image size................................ 100
11 File name ................................. 227
12 Time of recording .......... 40, 262
13 Date of recording........... 40, 262
14 Folder name............................ 225
15 Rating........................................ 201
16 Metering................................... 128
17 Shooting
mode................. 47, 58, 65, 118
18 Shutter speed......................... 118
19 Aperture................................... 118
20 ISO sensitivity 1....................... 107
21 Focal length ............................ 314
22 Active D-Lighting.................. 136
23 Picture Control.......................155
24 Color space..............................230
25 Flash mode.....................102, 104
26 White balance ........................ 140
White balance
fine-tuning........................... 143
Preset manual ........................ 145
27 Flash compensation............. 134
Commander mode 2............. 246
28 Exposure compensation..... 132
195Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the GPS or smart device (0269).
In the case of
movies, the data give the location at the start of recording.
196 Playback and Deletion
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-
frame playback.
The following operations can be performed
while zoom is in effect:
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To Use Description
Zoom in or out X / W (Q)
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 33× (large images),
25× (medium images) or 13× (small
images).
Press W (Q) to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor.
Keep multi selector
pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas
of frame.
Navigation window is briefly
displayed when zoom ratio is altered;
area currently visible in monitor is
indicated by yellow border.
Zoom
ratio is shown by bar at bottom of
navigation window; when zoom ratio
is 100%, bar is displayed green.
View other areas
of image
Crop image P
To crop image to area currently visible
in monitor, press P and select Trim
(0198).
197Playback and Deletion
Zoom in on faces P
To zoom in on faces detected by
camera, press P and select Face zoom
(0199). This option is available only if
faces are detected. If faces are
detected when the RGB histogram
(0190) display is zoomed in, Face
zoom will be available in the P-button
menu (Trim, however, will not be
available).
View other
images
Rotate command dial to view same
location in other images at current
zoom ratio.
Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Cancel zoom Cancel zoom and return to full-frame
playback.
Return to
shooting mode K /
Press the K button or press the
shutter-release button halfway to exit
to shooting mode.
To Use Description
198 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Cropping Photos
Follow the steps below to crop photos displayed during
playback zoom to the area currently visible in the monitor.
1Press P.
After adjusting zoom and scrolling
the photo until only the area you wish
to keep is visible in the monitor, press
the P button.
2Select Trim.
Highlight Trim and press 2.
3Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J to create
a cropped copy containing only the
portion of the image displayed in the
monitor.
P button
199Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Face Zoom
To zoom in on a face detected by the
camera, press the P button in the zoom
display and then highlight Face zoom
and press J.
The current subject is indicated by a
white frame in the navigation window.
Press X or W (Q) to zoom in or out, or use
the multi selector to view other faces.
P button
200 Playback and Deletion
Press the A(L) button to protect the current picture from
accidental deletion.
Protected files are marked with a P icon
and can not be deleted using the O button or the Delete option
in the playback menu.
Note that protected images will be
deleted when the memory card is formatted (0259).
To remove
protection from a picture so that it can be deleted, display or
highlight it and press the A (L) button.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
A (L) button
ARemoving Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu (0221), press the A (L) and
O buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
201Playback and Deletion
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.
Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D.
Rating is not available with protected images.
Rating Individual Pictures
1Select an image.
Display or highlight the image.
2Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
3Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press 2.
4Choose a rating.
Press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of
from zero to five stars, or select ) to
mark the picture as a candidate for
later deletion.
Press J to complete
the operation.
Rating Pictures
P button
202 Playback and Deletion
Rating Multiple Pictures
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple
pictures.
1Select Rating.
Highlight Rating in the playback
menu and press 2.
2Rate pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to
view the currently highlighted picture
full frame, press and hold the X
button) and press 1 or 3 to choose a
rating of from zero to five stars, or
select ) to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
Press J to complete the operation.
203Playback and Deletion
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart
device before connecting.
Movies can not be selected for
upload.
Selecting Individual Photos
1Select a photo.
Display the photo or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail playback.
2Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
3Choose Select to send to smart
device/deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device/deselect and press J.
Pictures selected for upload are
indicated by a & icon; to deselect,
display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Selecting Photos for Upload
P button
204 Playback and Deletion
Selecting Multiple Photos
Follow the steps below to change the upload status of multiple
photos.
1Choose Select image(s).
In the playback menu, select Select to
send to smart device, then highlight
Select image(s) and press 2.
2Select photos.
Use the multi selector to highlight photos and press the
W(Q) button to select or deselect (to view the highlighted
picture full screen, press and hold the X button).
Selected
photos are marked by a & icon.
3Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
ADeselecting All Photos
To deselect all photos, select Select to send to smart device in the
playback menu, highlight Deselect all, and press 2.
A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to remove upload
marking from all photos on the memory card.
205Playback and Deletion
To delete the current photograph, press the O button. To delete
multiple selected photographs, all photographs taken on a
selected date, or all photographs in the current playback folder,
use the Delete option in the playback menu.
Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that are
protected can not be deleted.
During Playback
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.
1Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
2Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again.
To exit without deleting
the photograph, press the K button.
Deleting Photographs
ACalendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the
O button (0186).
O button
206 Playback and Deletion
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options.
Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
picture and press the W (Q) button to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button).
Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon.
Repeat as desired to select additional
pictures.
2Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
Option Description
QSelected Delete selected pictures.
nSelect date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date
(0207).
RAll Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected
for playback (0221).
W (Q) button
207Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select
all pictures taken on the highlighted
date.
Selected dates are indicated by
check marks.
Repeat as desired to
select additional dates; to deselect a
date, highlight it and press 2.
2Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
208 Playback and Deletion
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a
slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (0221).
1Select Slide show.
Highlight Slide show in the playback
menu and press 2.
2Start the slide show.
Highlight Start in the slide show
menu and press J.
The following operations can be performed while the slide
show is in progress:
Slide Shows
To Use Description
Skip back/
skip ahead
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to
skip to next frame.
View
additional
photo info
Change photo info displayed (0188).
Pause Pause slide show.
Select Restart to
resume.
Raise/lower
volume
X /
W (Q)
Press X during movie playback to increase
volume, W (Q) to decrease.
Exit to
playback
mode
KEnd show and return to playback mode.
209Playback and Deletion
The dialog shown at right is displayed
when the show ends.
Select Restart to
restart or Exit to return to the playback
menu.
Slide Show Options
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide
show menu to select the images displayed by type or rating and
choose how long each image is displayed.
•Image type: Choose from Still images
and movies, Still images only,
Movies only, and By rating.
To
include only pictures with selected
ratings, highlight By rating and press
2.
A list of ratings will be displayed;
highlight ratings and press 2 to select
or deselect pictures with the
highlighted rating for inclusion in the
slide show.
Selected ratings are
indicated by a check mark.
Press J to
exit when the desired ratings are selected.
•Frame interval: Choose how long still
images are displayed.
210 Connections
Connections
To fine-tune photos and upload and view pictures, download
the latest version of the ViewNX-i installer from the following
website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete
installation.
An Internet connection is required.
For system
requirements and other information, see the Nikon website for
your region.
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
Installing ViewNX-i
ACapture NX-D
Use Nikon’s Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change
settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats.
Capture NX-D is available for download from:
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
211Connections
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed ViewNX-i (0210).
1Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory
card is inserted, connect a USB cable (available separately) as
shown and then turn the camera on.
Copying Pictures to the Computer
DUSB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
AUse a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged.
AConnecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting
interface cables.
Do not use force or attempt to insert the
connectors at an angle.
212 Connections
2Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a
program, select Nikon Transfer 2.
DDuring Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
AWindows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program.
A program
selection dialog will be displayed;
select Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2Double-click .
AWindows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may
display an AutoPlay prompt when the
camera is connected.
Tap or click the
dialog and then tap or click
Nikon Transfer 2 to select
Nikon Transfer 2.
AOS X
If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the
camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an
application that comes with OS X) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as
the application that opens when the camera is detected.
213Connections
3Click Start Transfer.
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
4Terminate the connection.
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and
disconnect the USB cable.
AFor More Information
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX-i.
Start Transfer
214 Connections
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
(0365) connected directly to the camera.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using a USB cable (available separately).
Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
When the camera and printer are turned on, a welcome screen
will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
Printing Photographs
DSelecting Photographs for Printing
NEF (RAW) photographs (098) can not be selected for printing.
JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)
processing option in the retouch menu (0280).
DDate Imprint
If you select On for Print date in the PictBridge menu when printing
photographs containing date information recorded using Custom
Setting d4 (Date stamp; 0243), the date will appear twice.
The
imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are
cropped or printed without a border.
215Connections
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1Display the desired picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
Press the X button
to zoom in on the current frame (0196; press K to exit
zoom).
To view eight pictures at a time, press the W(Q)
button.
Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press
X to display the highlighted picture full frame.
2Adjust printing options.
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default
option, select Printer default).
After selecting an option,
press J to return to the printer settings menu.
Option Description
Page size Choose a page size.
No.
of copies
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time.
Press 1 or 3 to choose number of
copies (maximum 99).
Border Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.
Print date Choose whether to print the times and dates of
recordings on photos.
Cropping
This option is listed only when pictures are printed
one at a time.
To exit without cropping, highlight No
cropping and press J.
To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2.
A crop selection dialog
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the
crop, W (Q) to decrease, and use the multi selector to
position the crop.
Note that print quality may drop if
small crops are printed at large sizes.
216 Connections
3Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
Printing Multiple Pictures
1Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.
2Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
•Print select: Select pictures for printing.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll
through pictures (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold theX button) and press 1 or 3 to
choose the number of prints.
To deselect a picture, set the
number of prints to zero.
•Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date and press 2
to select or deselect.
To view the pictures taken on the
selected date, press W (Q).
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures, or press and hold X to view the
current picture full screen.
Press W (Q) again to return to
the date selection dialog.
•Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the
memory card, proceed to Step 3.
Note that if the memory
card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256
images will be printed.
A warning will be displayed if the
page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index print.
217Connections
3Adjust printer settings.
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 215.
4Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel
before all copies have been printed, press J.
218 Connections
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable
(0324) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition
video devices.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
Tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera
on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be
displayed on the television screen.
Note that the edges of
images may not be displayed.
Viewing Pictures on TV
APlayback Volume
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls
can not be used.
ATelevision Playback
Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for
extended playback.
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for
HDMI device)
Connect to
camera
219Connections
❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution
To choose the format for images output
to the HDMI device, select HDMI >
Output resolution in the camera setup
menu (0258).
If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format.
❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu
(0258) when the camera is connected to a television that
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are on,
the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide
shows.
If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used
to control the camera, but the camera can be used to shoot
photographs and movies in live view.
AHDMI-CEC Devices
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer
Electronics Control) is a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used
to control peripherals to which they are connected.
When the camera
is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder
in place of the number of exposures remaining.
A1920 × 1080 60p/50p
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings
> Frame size/frame rate may cause variations in the resolution and
frame rate of the data output to HDMI devices during recording.
DHDMI > Output Resolution
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or
1920 × 1080; 50p.
Some devices may not support an Output
resolution setting of Auto.
220 DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Camera Menus
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D
(playback menu) tab.
Playback Menu Options
The playback menu contains the following options:
DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
G button
Option Default 0
Delete —206
Playback folder All 221
Playback display options —221
Image review On 221
Auto image rotation On 222
Rotate tall On 222
Slide show
Image type Still images and movies 208
Frame interval 2 s
Rating —202
Select to send to smart device —204
221DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Choose a folder for playback:
Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
(0188).
Press 1 or 3 to highlight and
press 2 to select or deselect.
Selected
items are indicated by check marks.
To
return to the playback menu, press J.
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting.
If Off is selected, pictures
can only be displayed by pressing the D button.
Playback Folder
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Option Description
D5600 Pictures in all folders created with the D5600 will be visible
during playback.
All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Current
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage
folder in the shooting menu (0225) are displayed during
playback.
Playback Display Options
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Image Review
G button ➜Dplayback menu
222 DThe Playback Menu: Managing Images
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
during playback or when viewed in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D
(0210).
The following orientations are recorded:
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.
Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with
the lens pointing up or down.
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be
automatically rotated for display in the monitor (pictures taken
with Off selected for Auto image rotation will still be displayed
in landscape orientation).
Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images
are not rotated automatically during image review.
Auto Image Rotation
G button ➜Dplayback menu
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Rotate Tall
G button ➜Dplayback menu
223CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the
C(shooting menu) tab.
Shooting Menu Options
The shooting menu contains the following options:
CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
G button
Option Default 0
Reset shooting menu —225
Storage folder —225
File naming DSC 227
Image quality JPEG normal 98
Image size Large 100
NEF (RAW) recording 14-bit 227
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity P, S, A, M100 107
Other modes Auto
Auto ISO sensitivity control Off 228
White balance Auto 140
Fluorescent Cool-white fluorescent 141
Set Picture Control Standard 155
Manage Picture Control —161
Color space sRGB 230
Active D-Lighting Auto 136
HDR (high dynamic range) Off 138
224 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
* Available only with lenses that support this item.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Release mode
m, wContinuous H 75
Other modes Single frame
Long exposure NR Off 230
High ISO NR Normal 231
Vignette control Normal 231
Auto distortion control Off 232
Optical VR *On 232
Interval timer shooting
Start options Now 110
Interval 1 min. 110
Number of times 1111
Exposure smoothing Off 111
Time-lapse movie
Interval 5 sec. 172
Shooting time 25 sec. 172
Exposure smoothing On 173
Movie settings
Frame size/frame rate 1920 × 1080; 60p
168
Movie quality Normal
Microphone Auto sensitivity
Wind noise reduction Off
Manual movie settings Off
Option Default 0
225CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ Selecting Folders by Folder Number
1Choose Select folder by number.
Highlight Select folder by number and press 2.
2Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change.
If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
•W : Folder is empty.
•X : Folder is partially full.
•Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999.
No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the main
menu (to exit without choosing the storage folder, press the
G button).
If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
Reset Shooting Menu
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Storage Folder
G button ➜Cshooting menu
226 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
❚❚ Selecting Folders from a List
1Choose Select folder from list.
Highlight Select folder from list and
press 2.
2Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
main menu.
Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder.
DFolder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken.
To continue shooting, create a
folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a
number less than 999 and less than 999 images.
AStartup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
227CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or,
in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space
(0230), “_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-
letter extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”).
The File naming option
is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the
file name.
For information on editing file names, see page 162.
Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
File Naming
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AExtensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.JPG”
for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and “.NDF” for dust off reference
data. In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of
NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names
but different extensions.
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Option Description
(12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12
bits.
)14-bit
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit
depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
228 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Adjust ISO sensitivity (0107).
❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by
the user (0107).
When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the value selected by the user.
The maximum value
for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum
sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu
(choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines), but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected
by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity,
the value selected by the user will be used instead; the minimum
value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100).
In
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure
would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (1/2000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by
the user).
If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the
focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can be
fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2).
Slower
shutter speeds will be used only if optimal exposure can not be
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum
sensitivity.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜Cshooting menu
229CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
When On is selected, the viewfinder
shows ISO AUTO and the information
display ISO-A.
These indicators flash when
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user.
AMaximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed
When auto ISO sensitivity control is
enabled, the ISO sensitivity and shutter
speed graphics in the information
display show the maximum sensitivity
and minimum shutter speed.
AAuto ISO Sensitivity Control
Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO
sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes
(available with the built-in flash and the optional flash units listed on
page 315), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter
speeds.
Minimum shutter speed
Maximum sensitivity
230 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction.
sRGB is recommended for general-purpose
printing and display; Adobe RGB, with its broader gamut of
colors, for professional publication and commercial printing.
Regardless of the option selected, movies are recorded in sRGB.
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots
or fog).
The time required for processing roughly doubles;
during processing, “lm” will flash in the shutter speed/
aperture displays and pictures can not be taken (if the camera is
turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be
saved but noise reduction will not be performed).
In continuous
release mode, frame rates will slow and while photographs are
being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
Color Space
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AAdobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
AColor Space
ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D automatically select the correct color
space when opening photographs created with this camera.
Results
can not be guaranteed with third-party software.
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
231CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise.”
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a
photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G, E,
and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
Its effects vary from lens to
lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture.
Choose
from High, Normal, Low, and Off.
High ISO NR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
Option Description
High Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels), particularly
in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Choose the
amount of noise reduction performed from High, Normal,
and Low.
Normal
Low
Off Noise reduction is performed only as required and never at
an amount as high as when Low is selected.
Vignette Control
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AVignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral brightness,
while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have
been modified from default settings may not produce the desired
effect.
Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
Vignette
control does not apply to movies (0164) or to pictures taken with
lenses that support FX format.
232 CThe Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-
angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when
shooting with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible
in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph,
and that the time needed to process photographs before
recording begins may increase).
This option does not apply to
movies and is available only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC,
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting
On enables vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway (0372). Select Off
to disable vibration reduction.
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜Cshooting menu
ARetouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 287.
Optical VR
G button ➜Cshooting menu
AThe Vibration Reduction Indicator
A vibration reduction indicator appears in
the information display when On is selected
for Optical VR.
233ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
G button
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Reset custom
settings (0235)
234 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Settings
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting Default 0
Reset custom settings 235
aAutofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection Focus 235
a2 Number of focus points 39 points 236
a3 Built-in AF-assist illuminator On 237
a4 Rangefinder Off 237
a5 Manual focus ring in AF mode *Enable 238
bExposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1/3 step 239
b2 ISO display Off 239
cTimers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L Off 239
c2 Auto off timers Normal 240
c3 Self-timer Self-timer delay: 10 s;
Number of shots: 1 241
dShooting/display
d1 Exposure delay mode Off 241
d2 File number sequence Off 242
d3 Viewfinder grid display Off 243
d4 Date stamp Off 243
d5 Reverse indicators 245
eBracketing/flash
e1 Flash cntrl for built-in flash/
Optional flash TTL 246
e2 Auto bracketing set AE bracketing 251
235ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (082), this
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever
the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only
when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
f Controls
f1 Assign Fn button ISO sensitivity 252
f2 Assign AE-L/AF-L button AE/AF lock 254
f3 Assign touch Fn Viewfinder grid display 255
f4 Reverse dial rotation Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U256
* Available only with lenses that support this item.
Reset Custom Settings
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
GRelease Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
FFocus Photos can only be taken once the camera has
focused.
Custom Setting Default 0
236 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection.
a2: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
#39 points
Choose from the 39 focus
points shown at right.
A11 points
Choose from the 11 focus
points shown at right.
Use for quick focus-point
selection.
237ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus
operation when lighting is poor.
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether
the camera is correctly focused in manual focus mode (095;
note that this function is not available in shooting mode M, when
the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject is
correctly exposed).
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
On The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for
more information, see page 342).
Off
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus
operation.
The camera may not be able to focus using
autofocus when lighting is poor.
a4: Rangefinder
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Indicator Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is slightly in front of subject.
AF-assist illuminator
238 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
This item is displayed only with lenses that support it.
Selecting
Enable allows the lens focus ring to be used for manual focus
when the camera is in autofocus mode; this is known as
“autofocus with manual override” (M/A).
After pressing the
shutter-release button halfway to focus, keep the button
pressed halfway and adjust focus using the focus ring.
To
refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release
button and then press it halfway again.
To prevent the lens focus
ring being used for manual focus when the camera is in
autofocus mode, select Disable.
Focus point is well in front of subject.
Focus point is slightly behind subject.
Focus point is well behind subject.
Camera can not determine correct focus.
AUsing the Electronic Rangefinder
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of
f/5.6 or faster.
The desired results may not be achieved in situations in
which the camera would be unable to focus using autofocus (086).
The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.
a5: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Indicator Description
239ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Select the increments used when making adjustments to shutter
speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and
bracketing.
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of
the number of exposures remaining.
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
b: Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
b2: ISO Display
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
240 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no
operations are performed during menu display and playback
(Playback/menus), while photographs are displayed in the
monitor after shooting (Image review), and during live view
(Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and
information display remain on when no operations are
performed (Standby timer).
Choose shorter auto-off delays to
reduce the drain on the battery.
c2: Auto off Timers
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description (all times are approximate)
CShort
DNormal
ELong
Auto off timers are set to the following values:
Playback/
menus
Image
review Live view Standby
timer
Short 20 s 4 s 5 min. 4 s
Normal 5min. 4s 10min. 8s
Long 10 min. 20 s 20 min. 1 min.
FCustom
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image
review, Live view, and Standby timer.
When settings
are complete, press J.
AAuto off Timers
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the
camera is connected to a computer or printer via USB.
241ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number
of shots taken.
•Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
•Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at
intervals of about 4 seconds).
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur
pictures, select On to delay shutter release until about 1 s after
the shutter-release button is pressed and the mirror is raised.
c3: Self-Timer
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
242 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by
adding one to the last file number used.
This option controls
whether file numbering continues from the last number used
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a
new memory card is inserted in the camera.
d2: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
On
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering
continues from the last number used or from the largest file
number in the current folder, whichever is higher.
If a
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.
Off
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,
the memory card formatted, or a new memory card inserted
in the camera.
Note that a new folder is created
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current
folder contains 999 photographs.
Reset
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is assigned
a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the
current folder. If the folder is empty, file numbering is reset to
0001.
DFile Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d2 (File number sequence) and
then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory
card.
243ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for
reference when composing photographs (05).
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they
are taken.
Date stamps can not be added to or removed from
existing photos.
At settings other than Off, the selected
option is indicated by a d icon in the
information display.
d3: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
d4: Date Stamp
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
Off The time and date do not appear on photographs.
aDate The date or date and time
are imprinted on
photographs taken while
this option is in effect.
bDate and
time
cDate
counter
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp
showing the number of days between the date of
shooting and a selected date (see below).
ADate Stamp
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date
(0262).
The imprinted data may be cropped out or rendered illegible
in copies created when images are retouched (0277).
The date does
not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.
15
.
10
.
201615
.
10
.
2016
15
.
10
.
2016 10
:0215
.
10
.
2016 10
:02
244 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
❚❚ Date Counter
Pictures taken while this option is in
effect are imprinted with the number of
days remaining until a future date or the
number of days elapsed since a past date.
Use it to track the growth of a child or
count down the days until a birthday or
wedding.
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.
1Enter the first date.
The first time you select Date counter,
you will be prompted to enter a date
for the first slot.
Enter a date using the
multi selector and press J to exit to
the date list.
2Enter additional dates or edit
existing dates.
To change a date or enter additional
dates, highlight a slot, press 2, and
enter a date as described above.
3Choose a date.
Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.
Future date (two days remaining) Past date (two days elapsed)
02
/
15
.
10
.
201602
/
15
.
10
.
2016
02
/
19
.
10
.
201602
/
19
.
10
.
2016
245ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
4Choose a date counter format.
Highlight Display options and press
2, then highlight a date format and
press J.
5Exit the date counter menu.
Press J to exit the date counter menu.
If (V) is selected, the exposure indicators in
the viewfinder and information display are displayed with
positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Select (W) to display negative values on
the left and positive values on the right.
d5: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
246 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M
modes.
When an optional SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash unit is
attached and turned on, this option changes to Optional flash
and is used to choose the flash mode for the optional flash unit.
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash/Optional Flash
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
1TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response
to shooting conditions.
2Manual
Choose a flash level.
At full power, the built-in
flash has a Guide Number of 12/39 (m/ft., ISO 100,
20 °C/68 °F).
4Commander
mode
This option is available when an optional SB-500
flash unit is mounted on the camera accessory
shoe.
In commander mode, the SB-500 functions
as a master flash for wireless remote control of
groups of optional off-camera flash units (0247).
AManual
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0
appears in the information display when
Manual is selected and the flash is on or
raised.
247ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
❚❚ Commander Mode
When an optional SB-500 flash unit is mounted on the accessory
shoe, select Commander mode to use the SB-500 as a master
flash controlling one or more remote optional flash units in up to
two groups (A and B) using advanced wireless lighting (0315).
Selecting this option displays the menu
shown at right.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
the following options, 1 or 3 to change.
ATTL Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is
used in combination with the built-in flash (0101) or optional flash
units (0315).
•i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel
RGB sensor is used to adjust flash output for a natural balance
between the main subject and the background.
•Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the
main subject; the brightness of the background is not taken into
account.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when
selected with the optional flash unit.
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR is used in all other cases.
248 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Option Description
Optional
flash Choose a flash mode for the master (commander) flash.
TTL i-TTL mode.
Choose flash compensation from values
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
MChoose the flash level.
–– Only the remote flash units fire; the master flash does not,
although it does emit monitor pre-flashes.
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
TTL i-TTL mode.
Choose flash compensation from values
between +3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
%A
Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units;
0315).
Choose flash compensation from values between
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1
/
3EV.
MChoose the flash level.
–– The flash units in this group do not fire.
Group B
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B.
The
options available are the same as those listed for Group A,
above.
Channel Choose from channels 1–4.
All flash units in both groups
must be set to the same channel.
249ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander
mode.
1Adjust settings for the master flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the master flash.
Note
that output level can not be adjusted
in –– mode.
2Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group A.
3Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in
group B.
4Select the channel.
If the remote flash units include an
SB-500, select channel 3.
5Press J.
250 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
6Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown
below.
Note that the maximum distance at which the remote
flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.
7Configure the remote flash units.
Turn all the remote flash units on, adjust group settings as
desired, and set them to the channel selected in Step 4. See
the flash unit instruction manuals for details.
8Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the
flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit, frame the
photograph, focus, and shoot.
AThe Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the information display when –– is selected for
Optional flash >Mode.
60 ° or less
Master flash
(SB-500, mounted on camera)
Wireless remote sensors on flash units
should face camera.
Group B: 7 m/22 ft or less
Group A: 10 m/32 ft or less
251ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active
D-Lighting) varied when bracketing is in effect (0151).
AFlash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the M (Y) and E (N)
buttons and command dial is added to the flash compensation values
selected for the master flash, group A, and group B in the Commander
mode menu.
A Y icon is displayed in the viewfinder when a flash
compensation value other than ±0 is selected for the master or remote
flash units in TTL or %A mode.
DCommander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is
not mounted on a tripod).
The remote flash units should normally be
placed closer to the subject than to the camera.
Be sure that direct
light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the
camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units
(%A mode), as this may interfere with exposure.
To prevent timing
flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs
taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures
(high f-numbers) or rotate the flash head on the master flash to point
upwards.
After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and
view the results in the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that
may be used, the practical maximum is three.
With more than this
number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with
performance.
e2: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
252 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the role played by the Fn button.
f: Controls
f1: Assign Fn Button
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
vImage
quality/size
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select image quality and size
(098).
wISO
sensitivity
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select ISO sensitivity (0107).
mWhite
balance
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select white balance (P, S, A, and M
modes only; 0140).
!Active
D-Lighting
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to select Active D-Lighting (P, S, A,
and M modes only; 0136).
$HDR
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to adjust HDR (P, S, A, and M modes
only; 0138).
&+NEF (RAW)
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal,
or JPEG basic, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed.
To exit without recording an NEF (RAW)
copy, press the Fn button again.
This option has no
effect in the following special effects modes: %, S,
T, U, ', (, and 3.
Fn button
253ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
tAuto
bracketing
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to choose the bracketing increment
(exposure and white balance bracketing) or to turn
ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only;
0151).
"AF-area
mode
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the
command dial to choose an AF-area mode (087).
'Viewfinder
grid display
Press the Fn button to
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
cWi-Fi Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu
(0272).
Option Description
254 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Choose the role played by the A (L)
button.
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
BAE/AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button
is pressed.
CAE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
EAE lock
(Hold)
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
FAF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
AAF-ON The A (L) button initiates autofocus.
The
shutter-release button can not be used to focus.
A (L) button
255ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
A touch-sensitive area of the monitor can be used to control the
camera after the monitor has turned off automatically. The
position of this “touch Fn” area varies with the position of the
monitor; the role it plays can be chosen from the options in the
table below.
Slide your finger left or right across the area
indicated in the illustration to adjust the chosen option (note
that touch Fn is not available when the monitor is facing
forward).
If you find that your face contacts the touch Fn area
when you look through the viewfinder, use the monitor in the
extended position.
f3: Assign Touch Fn
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Touch Fn area
Monitor in normal position Monitor extended
Option Description
#Focus-point
selection
When an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is
selected for AF-area mode, you can slide a finger
over the touch Fn area to position the focus point
(090).
wISO
sensitivity
Slide a finger left or right over the touch Fn area to
adjust ISO sensitivity (0107), up or down to turn
auto ISO sensitivity control (0228) on or off (P, S, A,
and M modes only).
!Active
D-Lighting
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only;
0136).
256 ACustom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dial when it is used to make
adjustments to exposure or flash
compensation (Exposure
compensation) and/or shutter speed
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture).
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect, then press
J.
$HDR Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust HDR
(P, S, A, and M modes only; 0138).
tAuto
bracketing
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose the
bracketing increment (exposure and white
balance bracketing) or to turn ADL bracketing on
or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0151).
"AF-area
mode
Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to choose an
AF-area mode (087).
'Viewfinder
grid display
Tap the touch Fn area to
display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
%Aperture Slide a finger over the touch Fn area to adjust
aperture (A and M modes only; 0122, 123).
None Disable touch Fn.
DTouch Fn
Touch Fn is available only if Enable is selected for Touch controls
(0263) and Info display auto off (0265) is on.
f4: Reverse Dial Rotation
G button ➜ACustom Settings menu
Option Description
257BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
Setup Menu Options
The setup menu contains the following options:
BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button
Option Default 0
Format memory card —259
Image comment —260
Copyright information —261
Time zone and date 1
Sync with smart device Off 262
Daylight saving time Off
Language 1—262
Beep options
Beep on/off On 263
Pitch Low 263
Touch controls Enable 263
Monitor brightness 0263
Info display format
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS Graphic 264
P/S/A/M Graphic
Auto info display On 265
Info display auto off On 265
Clean image sensor
Clean at startup/shutdown Clean at startup &
shutdown 328
258 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Lock mirror up for cleaning 2—330
Image Dust Off ref photo —266
Flicker reduction Auto 268
Slot empty release lock Release locked 268
HDMI
Output resolution Auto 219
Device control On
Location data
Download from smart device No
269
Position —
External GPS device options
Standby timer Enable
Set clock from satellite Yes
Remote control
Remote shutter release Take photos 270
Assign Fn button Same as camera 4 button 270
Airplane mode Disable 271
Connect to smart device —271
Send to smart device (auto) Off 272
Wi-Fi
Network settings —
272Current settings —
Reset connection settings —
Bluetooth
Network connection Disable
273Paired devices —
Send while off On
Eye-Fi upload 3Enable 274
Option Default 0
259BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
1 Default varies with country of purchase.
2 Not available when battery is low.
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and
unavailable.
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
formatted in other devices.
Format the card as described below.
1Highlight Yes.
To exit without formatting the
memory card, highlight No and press
J.
2Press J.
A message will be displayed while the
card is formatted.
Do not remove the
memory card or remove or disconnect
the power source until formatting is
complete.
Conformity marking —276
Firmware version —276
Format Memory Card
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DFormatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may
contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to
keep to a computer before proceeding (0211).
Option Default 0
260 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D.
The comment is also visible on the shooting data
page in the photo information display (0193). The following
options are available:
•Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 162.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
•Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs.
Attach comment can
be turned on and off by highlighting it
and pressing 2.
After choosing the
desired setting, press J to exit.
Image Comment
G button ➜Bsetup menu
261BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data
shown in the photo information display and can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX-i or in Capture NX-D.
The following options
are available:
•Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 162.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
•Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 162.
Copyright holder names can be up to 54
characters long.
•Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright
information to all subsequent
photographs.
Attach copyright
information can be turned on and off
by highlighting it and pressing 2.
After choosing the desired setting,
press J to exit.
Copyright Information
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DCopyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or
transferring the camera to another person.
Nikon does not accept
liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the
Copyright information option.
262 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Change time zones, synchronize the clock with the clock on a
smart device, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
Time Zone and Date
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
Time zone Choose a time zone.
The camera clock is automatically
set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock (040).
Sync with
smart device
Choose whether the camera clock is updated to the
time (Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC), time zone,
and standard or daylight saving time supplied by the
smart device.
Date format Choose the order in which the day, month, and year
are displayed.
Daylight
saving time
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
The camera clock
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
Language
G button ➜Bsetup menu
263BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Beeps sound when the camera focuses, in self-timer mode, and
when time-lapse recording ends or touch-screen controls are
used.
❚❚ Beep On/Off
Select Off (touch controls only) to mute
the sounds the camera makes in
response to touch-screen controls, or
choose Off to prevent beeps from
sounding altogether.
❚❚ Pitch
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the sounds made when time-
lapse recording ends or in response to focus and self-timer
operations.
Select Disable to prevent accidental use of touch-screen
controls (015), or Playback only to enable touch-screen
controls in playback mode only.
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness.
Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
Beep Options
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Touch Controls
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜Bsetup menu
264 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose an information display format (06).
Formats can be
chosen separately for auto, scene, and special effects modes and
for P, S, A, and M modes.
1Select a shooting mode option.
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or
P/S/A/M and press 2.
2Select a design.
Highlight a design and press J.
Info Display Format
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Classic Graphic
265BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
If Off is selected, the
information display can be viewed by pressing the R button.
If On is selected, the eye sensor will turn the information display
off when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Selecting Off
prevents the display turning off when you look through the
viewfinder, but also increases the drain on the battery.
Auto Info Display
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Info Display Auto Off
G button ➜Bsetup menu
266 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX-D (for more information, refer to Capture NX-D
online help).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera.
A lens with a focal length of at least
50 mm is recommended.
When using a zoom lens, zoom all the
way in.
1Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options
and press J.
To exit without
acquiring image dust off data, press
G.
•Start: The message shown at right
will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder.
•Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting.
The message shown
at right will be displayed and “rEF”
will appear in the viewfinder when cleaning is complete.
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DImage Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image
sensor cleaning is performed.
Select Clean sensor and then start
only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing
photographs.
267BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
2Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button
halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or
too dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will
be displayed.
Choose another
reference object and repeat the
process from step 1.
DImage Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or
at different apertures.
Reference images can
not be viewed using computer imaging
software.
A grid pattern is displayed when
reference images are viewed on the camera.
268 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or
mercury-vapor lighting during live view (055) or movie
recording (0164).
Choose Auto to allow the camera to
automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match
the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in
demo mode).
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜Bsetup menu
AFlicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz
options and choose the one that produces the best results.
Flicker
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very
bright, in which case you should select mode A or M and choose a
smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting live view.
Note that
flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie
settings > Manual movie settings (0169) in mode M.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜Bsetup menu
269BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Adjust location data settings for use when the camera is
connected to a GPS or smart device.
Location Data
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
Download
from smart
device
Select Yes to download location data from the smart
device and embed them in pictures taken over the next
two hours.
If the camera is connected to both a smart
device and a GPS unit, location data will be downloaded
from the GPS unit. Location data can not be acquired if
the camera is off or the standby timer has expired.
Position
View the location data supplied by the GPS or smart
device (the items displayed vary with the device and in
the case of movies are for the start of recording).
External
GPS device
options
Adjust settings for connection to optional GPS devices.
•Standby timer: Choose whether the standby timer
remains active while a GPS device is connected.
If
Enable is selected, the exposure meters will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for the
period specified in Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers,
0240), reducing the drain on the battery.
If a GP-1 or
GP-1A unit is connected, the unit will remain active for a
set period after the timer expires; to allow the camera
time to acquire location data, the delay is extended by
up to one minute after exposure meters are activated or
the camera is turned on.
Select Disable to disable the
standby timer when a GPS device is connected.
•Set clock from satellite: Select Ye s to synchronize the
camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
270 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Choose the functions performed using optional remote cords or
wireless remote controllers (0323, 324).
❚❚ Remote Shutter Release
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for photography or movie recording.
❚❚ Assign Fn button
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote
controllers.
Remote Control
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
yTake photos The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used to take photographs.
zRecord movies
The shutter-release button on the optional
accessory is used for movie recording.
Press the
button halfway to start live view or to focus in
AF-S and AF-F modes.
Press the button all the
way down to start or end recording.
Use the
camera live view switch to end live view.
Option Description
=4Same as camera
4 button
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
performs the function currently assigned to the
camera A (L) button (0254).
aLive view The Fn button on the wireless remote controller
can be used to start and end live view.
271BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Select Enable to disable the wireless features of Eye-Fi cards and
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections to smart devices.
Connections
to other devices using a wireless transmitter can only be
disabled by removing the transmitter from the camera.
Adjust settings for connection to smart
devices.
Airplane Mode
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Connect to Smart Device
G button ➜Bsetup menu
ASecurity
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to
freely connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its
range, the following may occur if security is not enabled:
•Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless
transmissions to steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal
information.
•Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the
network and alter data or perform other malicious actions.
Note that
due to the design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow
unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
272 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
If On is selected, new photos will automatically be uploaded to
the smart device (if the camera is not currently connected to the
smart device, the photos will be marked for upload and
uploaded the next time a wireless connection is established).
Movies are not uploaded.
Adjust Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) settings.
Send to Smart Device (Auto)
G button ➜Bsetup menu
AUpload Marking
No more than 1000 photos can be marked for upload at a time.
Before changing the rating of photos that are marked for upload,
select Disable for Bluetooth > Network connection or switch
wireless off by selecting Enable for Airplane mode.
Wi-Fi
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
Network settings Adjust settings for Wi-Fi connections.
Current settings View current Wi-Fi settings.
Reset connection
settings Restore Wi-Fi settings to their default values.
273BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
List paired devices and adjust settings for connection to smart
devices.
Bluetooth
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Option Description
Network
connection Enable or disable Bluetooth.
Paired devices View paired devices.
Send while off Select Off to suspend wireless transmissions when
the camera is turned off or the standby timer expires.
274 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the
camera.
Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected
destination.
Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal
strength is insufficient.
Before uploading pictures via Eye-Fi,
select Disable for Airplane mode (0271) and Bluetooth >
Network connection (0273).
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
Eye-Fi Upload
G button ➜Bsetup menu
DEye-Fi Cards
Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected.
A g icon displayed when Disable is selected indicates that the camera
is unable to control the Eye-Fi card (0275); turn the camera off and
remove the card.
Select longer values for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) >
Custom > Standby timer (0240) when using an Eye-Fi card.
See the manual provided with the Eye-Fi card, and direct any inquiries
to the manufacturer.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on
and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi functions.
DAirplane Mode (0271)
Enabling airplane mode disables Eye-Fi upload.
To resume Eye-Fi
upload, select Disable for Airplane mode before selecting Enable for
Eye-Fi upload.
275BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status
is indicated by an icon in the information
display:
•d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
•e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no
pictures available for upload.
•f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled;
waiting to begin upload.
•f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
•g: Error — camera can not control Eye-Fi card. If a flashing (
appears in the viewfinder, check that the Eye-Fi card firmware
is up-to-date; if the error persists after the card firmware has
been updated, insert a different card or format the card in the
camera after copying any pictures it contains to a computer or
other storage device.
If the ( indicator is not flashing,
pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to
change Eye-Fi settings.
ASupported Eye-Fi Cards
Some cards may not be available in some countries or regions; consult
the manufacturer for more information.
Eye-Fi cards are for use only in
the country of purchase. Be sure the Eye-Fi card firmware has been
updated to the latest version.
276 BThe Setup Menu: Camera Setup
View a selection of the standards with which the camera
complies.
View the current camera firmware version.
Conformity Marking
G button ➜Bsetup menu
Firmware Version
G button ➜Bsetup menu
277NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N
(retouch menu) tab.
Retouch Menu Options
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or
retouched copies of existing pictures.
The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera.
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting Retouch when a
retouched image or original is displayed in full-frame playback.
NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button
Option 0
0NEF (RAW)
processing 280
kTrim 282
1Resize 283
iD-Lighting 285
2Quick retouch 286
jRed-eye correction 286
eStraighten 287
(Distortion control 287
rPerspective control 288
)Fisheye 288
mFilter effects 289
lMonochrome 290
oImage overlay 291
qColor outline 293
UPhoto illustration 294
gColor sketch 294
uMiniature effect 295
3Selective color 296
)Painting 298
fEdit movie 178
pSide-by-side
comparison *298
Option 0
278 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1Display retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the
retouch menu and press 2.
2Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J (to
view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button).
3Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item.
To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
ARetouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created
with other devices.
If the image was recorded at image quality
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG (098), retouch options apply only to
the RAW copy.
279NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
4Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Except in the photo information
“image only” page (0188),
retouched copies are indicated by a Z
icon.
ACreating Retouched Copies During Playback
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-
frame playback (0184), press P, then highlight Retouch and press 2
and select a retouch option (Image overlay excluded).
ARetouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit
movie > Choose start/end point, each option can be applied only
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail).
Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and
unavailable.
AImage Quality and Size
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies
created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original,
while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large fine-
quality JPEG images.
280 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in
the retouch menu and press 2 to
display a picture selection dialog
listing only NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera.
2Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a
photograph (to view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press and hold
the X button).
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and proceed
to the next step.
NEF (RAW) Processing
G button ➜Nretouch menu
281NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
3Choose settings for the JPEG copy.
Adjust the settings listed below.
Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with pictures created with
image overlay (0291), and that the effects of exposure
compensation may differ from those that might have been
expected when the photograph was taken.
4Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the selected
photograph.
To exit without copying
the photograph, press the G
button.
Color space (0230)
Image size (0100)
Image quality (098)
White balance (0140)
Exposure compensation (0132)
Picture Control (0155)
High ISO NR (0231)
D-Lighting (0285)
Vignette control (0231)
282 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph.
The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as
described in the following table.
Trim
G button ➜Nretouch menu
To Use Description
Increase size of
crop XPress the X button to increase the size of the
crop.
Reduce size of
crop W (Q)Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of
the crop.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Rotate the command dial to choose the
aspect ratio.
Move crop
Use multi selector to position the crop.
Press
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the
desired position.
Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file.
AImage Size
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio)
appears at upper left in the crop display.
AViewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
ASee Also
See page 198 for information on cropping pictures during playback
zoom.
283NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1Select Resize.
To resize selected images, highlight
Resize in the retouch menu and press
2.
2Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
Resize
G button ➜Nretouch menu
284 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
3Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
Highlight pictures using the multi
selector and press the W (Q) button
to select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press
and hold the X button).
Selected
pictures are marked by a 1 icon.
Press J when the selection is
complete.
4Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Highlight Yes and press J
to save the resized copies.
AViewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are
displayed.
W (Q) button
285NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the
effect can be previewed in the edit display.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
❚❚ “Portrait”
To enable or disable this option,
highlight Portrait and press 2.
When
Portrait is enabled, the camera will apply
D-Lighting only to human portrait
subjects, brightening up to three such
subjects while leaving the background
untouched for an effect similar to that achieved with a reflector.
D-Lighting
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before D-Lighting
(U Portrait disabled)
D-Lighting
(M Portrait enabled)
APortrait Subjects
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait
D-Lighting (note that portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos
taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation in the playback
menu; 0222).
Depending on composition and how the subjects are
posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied,
remove the check from Portrait.
286 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create copies with enhanced saturation
and contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as
required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
enhancement.
Press J to copy the
photograph.
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and
is available only with photographs taken using the flash.
The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display.
Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
press J to create a copy.
Note that red-eye correction may not
always produce the expected results and may in very rare
circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
Quick Retouch
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜Nretouch menu
287NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a straightened copy of the
selected image.
Press 2 to rotate the
image clockwise by up to five degrees in
increments of approximately 0.25
degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be
trimmed to create a rectangular copy).
Press J to save the
retouched copy.
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion.
Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is
not available with photos taken using auto distortion control;
see page 232).
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion
distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result
in more of the edges being cropped out).
Press J to save the
retouched copy.
Straighten
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Distortion Control
G button ➜Nretouch menu
DAuto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses
(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
288 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object.
Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts
of perspective control result in more of
the edges being cropped out).
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Create copies that appear to have been
taken with a fisheye lens.
Press 2 to
increase the effect (this also increases the
amount that will be cropped out at the
edges of the image), 4 to reduce it.
Press
J to save the retouched copy.
Perspective Control
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Fisheye
G button ➜Nretouch menu
289NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy
the photograph.
Filter Effects
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Option Description
Skylight
Creates the effect of a
skylight filter, making the
picture less blue.
Warm filter
Creates a copy with warm
tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast.
Cross screen
Add starburst effects to light
sources.
•Number of points: Choose
from four, six, or eight.
•Filter amount: Choose the
brightness of the light
sources affected.
•Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
•Length of points: Choose the length of points.
•Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter.
Press X to
preview the copy full frame.
•Save: Create a retouched copy.
Soft
Add a soft filter effect.
Press
4 or 2 to choose the filter
strength.
290 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a
preview of the selected image; press 1
to increase color saturation, 3 to
decrease.
Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Monochrome
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Increase saturation
Decrease saturation
291NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging
application.
The new picture is saved at current image quality
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality
and size (098, 100; all options are available).
To create an NEF
(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with Image 1 highlighted;
press J to display a list of the NEF
(RAW) pictures created with this
camera.
Image Overlay
G button ➜Nretouch menu
+
292 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
2Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the
first photograph in the overlay.
To
view the highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X button.
Press J to select the highlighted
photograph and return to the preview display.
3Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1.
Highlight
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as
described in Step 2.
4Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and
optimize exposure for the overlay by
pressing 1 or 3 to select gain from
values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat
for the second image.
The default
value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it.
The
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5Preview the overlay.
To preview the composition as shown
at right, press 4 or 2 to place the
cursor in the Preview column, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay
and press J (note that colors and
brightness in the preview may differ from the final image).
To
save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save.
To
return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W (Q).
293NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
6Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an
overlay is created, the resulting image
will be displayed full-frame in the
monitor.
Create an outline copy of a photograph
to use as a base for painting.
Press J to
save the retouched copy.
DImage Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be
combined (0227).
The overlay has the same photo info as the
photograph selected for Image 1.
The current image comment is
appended to the overlay when it is saved; copyright information,
however, is not copied.
Color Outline
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
294 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring
for a poster effect.
Press 2 or 4 to make
outlines thicker or thinner.
Press J to
save the retouched copy.
Create a copy of a photograph that
resembles a sketch made with colored
pencils.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Vividness or Outlines and press 4 or 2
to change.
Vividness can be increased to
make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out,
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or
thinner.
Thicker outlines make colors more saturated.
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Photo Illustration
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Color Sketch
G button ➜Nretouch menu
295NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama.
Works
best with photos taken from a high vantage point.
The area that
will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.
Miniature Effect
G button ➜Nretouch menu
To Press Description
Choose
orientation W (Q)Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is
in focus.
Choose area
in focus
If area of effect is in
wide orientation, press
1 or 3 to position
frame showing area of
copy that will be in
focus.
If area of effect is in tall
orientation, press 4 or
2 to position frame
showing area of copy
that will be in focus.
Choose size
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or
2 to choose height.
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or
3 to choose width.
Create copy Create copy.
Area in focus
296 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the
retouch menu and press 2.
2Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph and press J
(to view the highlighted photograph
full frame, press and hold the X
button).
3Select a color.
Use the multi selector to position the
cursor over an object and press A
(L) to select the color of the object
as one that will remain in the final
copy (the camera may have difficulty
detecting unsaturated colors; choose
a saturated color).
To zoom in on the
picture for precise color selection,
press X.
Press W (Q) to zoom out.
Selective Color
G button ➜Nretouch menu
A (L) button
Selected color
297NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
4Highlight the color range.
Rotate the command dial to
highlight the color range for
the selected color.
5Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease
the range of similar hues that will be
included in the final photograph.
Choose from values between 1 and 7;
note that higher values may include
hues from other colors.
6Select additional colors.
To select additional colors,
rotate the command dial to
highlight another of the
three color boxes at the top
of the display and repeat
Steps 3–5 to select another color.
Repeat for a third color if
desired.
To deselect the highlighted color, press O (to remove
all colors, press and hold O.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; select Ye s ).
7Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Color range
298 NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Create a copy which emphasizes detail
and color for a painterly effect.
Press J
to save the retouched copy.
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the P button and selecting Retouch when a copy or
original is played back full frame.
1Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a
Z icon) or a photograph that has
been retouched in full-frame
playback.
Press P, then highlight
Retouch and press 2.
Painting
G button ➜Nretouch menu
Before After
Side-by-side Comparison
P button
299NThe Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
2Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison
in the retouch menu and press J.
3Compare the copy with the original.
The source image is displayed on the
left, the retouched copy on the right,
with the options used to create the
copy listed at the top of the display.
Press 4 or 2 to switch between the
source image and the retouched copy.
To view the highlighted picture full
frame, press and hold the X button.
If
the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1
or 3 to view the other source image.
If multiple copies exist
for the current source image, press 1 or 3 to view the other
copies.
Press J to return to playback with the highlighted
image displayed.
DSide-by-side comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted or that was protected when
the copy was made (0200).
Options used to create
copy
Source
image
Retouched
copy
300 mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used
settings, and My Menu, a custom menu listing up to 20 user-
selected options, can be accessed by pressing the G button
highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).
Choosing a Menu
Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.
1Select Choose tab.
Highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2Select a menu.
Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT
SETTINGS and press J to display the
selected menu.
mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
G button
301mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
m Recent Settings
When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected
for Choose tab, the menu lists the 20
most recently used settings, with the
most recently-used items first.
Press 1 or
3 to highlight an option and press 2 to
select.
O My Menu
Selecting O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a
customized menu of up to 20 options selected from the
playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus.
Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and
reorder items in My Menu.
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1Select Add items.
Highlight Add items and press 2.
2Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu
containing the option you wish to add
and press 2.
ARemoving Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
302 mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
3Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and
press J.
4Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up
or down in My Menu.
Press J to add
the new item.
Repeat steps 1–4 to
select additional items.
AAdding Options to My Menu
The items currently displayed in My Menu
are indicated by a check mark.
Items
indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
303mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1Select Remove items.
Highlight Remove items and press 2.
2Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select
or deselect.
Selected items are
indicated by a check mark.
3Delete the selected items.
Press J.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
304 mRecent Settings/OMy Menu
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1Select Rank items.
Highlight Rank items and press 2.
2Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move
and press J.
3Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or
down in My Menu and press J.
Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition
additional items.
4Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My
Menu.
G button
305Technical Notes
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
Compatible CPU Lenses
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I CPU
lenses only.
AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-P
lenses with AF-P, and AF-I lenses with AF-I.
Autofocus is not
supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses.
The following table
lists the features available with compatible lenses in viewfinder
photography:
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting Focus mode Shooting
mode Metering system
AF
MF (with
electronic
rangefinder) MF M
Other
modes
LM
N
Lens/accessory 3D Color
AF-S, AF-P, AF-I NIKKOR z z zzzz—z1
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR — z zzzz—z1
PC-E NIKKOR series2, 3 —z4zzzz—z1
PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E ED 3, 5 —z4zzzz—z1
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 6—z4zz —z—z1
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter z7z7zzzz—z1
Other AF NIKKOR (except
lenses for F3AF) —z8zz z —✔z1
AI-P NIKKOR — z9zz z —✔z1
1 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0128).
306 Technical Notes
2 The shift knob for the PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED may contact the camera body when the
lens is rotated. In addition, some combinations of shift and rotation may not be available due
to the lens contacting the camera body.
3 Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 Some combinations of shift and rotation may not be available due to the lens contacting the
camera body.
6 Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not
shifted or tilted.
7 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
8 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or
AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the
in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the
viewfinder is not in focus.
Before shooting, confirm that the image in the viewfinder screen is
in focus.
9 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
•Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies
are recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.
307Technical Notes
DIX NIKKOR Lenses
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
AIdentifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G,
E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel.
Type G and E lenses are
not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts Aperture ring
CPU lens Type G or E lens Type D lens
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the
aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).
AMatrix Metering
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set
exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with
type G, E, or D lenses, distance information (3D color matrix metering
II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering II;
which does not include 3D distance information).
308 Technical Notes
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode
M.
Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.
Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring
and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other
features requiring a CPU lens can not be used.
Some non-CPU
lenses can not be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and
Non-CPU Lenses,” below.
Camera setting Focus mode Shooting mode
Lens/accessory AF
MF (with
electronic
rangefinder) MF M
Other
modes
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon
Series E lenses —z1zz
2—
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4 — zzz
2, 3 —
Reflex NIKKOR — — zz
2—
PC NIKKOR — z4zz
2—
AI-type Teleconverter — z5zz
2—
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment6—z1zz
2—
Auto extension rings (PK-series
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11) —z1zz
2—
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
2 Exposure indicator can not be used.
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
309Technical Notes
DIncompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with
the D5600:
•TC-16A AF teleconverter
•Non-AI lenses
•Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5,
600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
•Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
•2.1cm f/4
•Extension Ring K2
•180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
•360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
•200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
•AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
•PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
•PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
•PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
•Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
•Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
•Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
310 Technical Notes
DAF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of
18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist illumination is not
available with the following lenses:
•AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
311Technical Notes
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the
AF-assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is
poor:
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
•AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
•AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G
•AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED
•AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR
•AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G
•AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.8G
•AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED
312 Technical Notes
DThe Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of
18–300 mm, although in some cases the flash may be unable to
entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to
shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that
block the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere
with red-eye reduction.
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Shadow Vignetting
The flash has a minimum range of about 0.6 m and can not be used in
the macro range of macro zoom lenses.
The flash may be unable to
light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than
those given below:
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED 24 mm 1.5 m / 4 ft 12 in.
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR 35 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR 24–85 mm No vignetting
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED 28 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
28 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
35 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
45–55 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
24 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
28 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED 24 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
28–35 mm No vignetting
313Technical Notes
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR,
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
18 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
24–55 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED 18 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
24–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
18 mm 2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
35–105 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED 18 mm 2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.
24–135 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
18 mm 1.0m/ 3ft 4in.
24 mm
35–140 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
24 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
35–200 mm No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR 35–300 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–6.3G ED VR 35–300 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED 20 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
24 mm 2.5 m/ 8 ft 3 in.
28 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
35 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED 24 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED 35 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
50–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED 24 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
28–120 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR 24 mm 1.5 m / 4 ft 12 in.
28–120 mm No vignetting
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED 35 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
50–70 mm No vignetting
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
28 mm 1.5 m/ 4 ft 12 in.
35 mm 1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
50–300 mm No vignetting
314 Technical Notes
Lens
Zoom
position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED,
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
200 mm 4.0m/13ft 2in.
250 mm 3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
300 mm 2.5m/ 8ft 3in.
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED * 24 mm 3.0 m/ 9 ft 11 in.
* When not shifted or tilted.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.
ACalculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm.
The
size of the area exposed by the D5600, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm,
meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5
times that of the D5600.
The approximate focal length of lenses for the
D5600 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal
length of the lens by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
Lens
(36 × 24 mm)
Picture diagonal
Picture size (D5600)
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Angle of view (35mm format)
Angle of view (D5600)
315Technical Notes
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers
improved communication between the camera and compatible
flash units for improved flash photography.
The built-in flash will
not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
SB-5000
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
Single flash
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced fill-
flash for digital SLR1zzzzz——zz
Standard i-TTL fill-
flash for digital SLR z2z2zz
2z——zz
%A Auto aperture zz
3———————
A Non-TTL auto —4z3———————
GN Distance-priority
manual zzz——————
M Manual zzzzz
5——z5z5
RPT Repeating flash zz———————
Optical Advanced
Wireless Lighting
Master
Remote flash control zzz—z5z———
i-TTL i-TTL zzz—z5————
[A:B] Quick wireless flash
control z—z——z6———
%A Auto aperture zz
7———————
A Non-TTL auto —z———————
M Manual zzz—z5————
RPT Repeating flash zz———————
316 Technical Notes
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3%A/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings.
“A” will be selected
when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 “A” will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
5 Can only be selected with camera (0246).
6 Available only during close-up photography.
7 “A” is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
8Choice of %A and A depends on the option selected with master flash.
9 Available only in commander mode.
10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or
SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups.
The SU-800 itself is not
equipped with a flash.
Optical Advanced
Wireless Lighting
Remote
i-TTL i-TTL zzzzz—z——
[A:B] Quick wireless flash
control zzzzz—z——
%A/A Auto aperture/
Non-TTL auto z8z7———————
MManual zzzzz—z——
RPT Repeating flash zzzzz————
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting — — ———————
Color Information Communication (flash) zzzzz——zz
Color Information Communication (LED light) — — — — z————
AF-assist for multi-area AF zzzz—z9———
Red-eye reduction zzzzz——z—
Camera flash mode selection — — — — z——zz
Camera flash unit firmware update zz
10 z—z———z
SB-5000
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-700
SB-600
SB-500
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
317Technical Notes
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and
manual modes.
Use with the camera in exposure mode S or M
and a shutter speed of 1/200 s or slower selected.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX1
SB-30, SB-27 2,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-15
SB-23,
SB-29 3,
SB-21B3,
SB-29S3
Flash mode
ANon-TTL auto z—z—
MManual zzz z
GRepeating flash z—— —
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4zzz z
1Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled.
Set flash unit to A
(non-TTL auto flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
AThe AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be
connected via a sync cable.
DUse Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units.
Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
Before
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-
authorized service representative for more information.
318 Technical Notes
DNotes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions.
If the flash
unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras.
The D5600 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %,
and 3, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the
built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800.
At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos
taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower
value.
If the flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after
a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full power and the
photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only;
for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other
units, see the manual provided with the flash).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.
We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard
i-TTL flash control.
Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit.
Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
If the controls on the optional SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700
or SB-600 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander are
used to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the information
display.
319Technical Notes
The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with
the following restrictions:
•SB-5000: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points
shown at right.
•SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with
17–135 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
•SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with
24–105 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
24–49 mm
50–69 mm
70–135 mm
17–19 mm
20–105 mm
106–135 mm
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
320 Technical Notes
•SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus points
shown at right.
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
24–135 mm
321Technical Notes
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available
for the D5600.
Other Accessories
Power sources •EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery (026): Additional
EN-EL14a batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon-authorized service representatives. EN-EL14
batteries can also be used.
•MH-24 Battery Charger (026): Recharge EN-EL14a and
EN-EL14 batteries.
•EP-5A Power Connector, EH-5b/EH-5c AC Adapter: These
accessories can be used to power the camera for
extended periods (EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also
be used).
A power connector EP-5A is required to
connect the camera to the EH-5c, EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5;
see page 325 for details.
Accessory shoe
covers
BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover: A cover protecting the accessory
shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.
Filters •Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
•The D5600 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.
•Neutral Color (NC) filters are recommended for
protecting the lens.
•To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or
when a bright light source is in the frame.
•Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8,
ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).
See the filter
manual for details.
322 Technical Notes
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
•DK-5 Eyepiece Cap (080): Prevents light entering via the
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or
interfering with exposure.
•DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with
diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1
when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the
neutral position (–1 m–1).
Use eyepiece correction
lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with
the built in diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to
+0.5 m–1).
Test eyepiece correction lenses before
purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved.
The rubber eyecup can not be used with
eyepiece correction lenses.
•DG-2 Magnifier: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in
the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during
focusing.
Eyepiece adapter required (available
separately).
Note that because the DG-2 interferes with
the eye sensor, you may find it necessary to select Off
for the Info display auto off item in the setup menu
(0265) when this accessory is attached.
•DK-22 Eyepiece Adapter: The DK-22 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier.
The monitor can not be rotated
with the adapter in place.
•DR-6 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a
right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the
image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to
the lens (for example, from directly above when the
camera is horizontal).
The monitor can not be rotated
with the attachment in place.
In addition, because the
DR-6 interferes with the eye sensor, you may find it
necessary to select Off for the Info display auto off
item in the setup menu when this accessory is attached.
323Technical Notes
Software Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer to record movies and photographs and save
photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the
websites listed on page xxi for the latest information on
supported operating systems. At default settings, Nikon
Message Center 2 will periodically check for updates to
Nikon software and firmware while you are logged in to
an account on the computer and the computer is
connected to the Internet.
A message is automatically
displayed when an update is found.
Body caps BF-1B Body Cap/BF-1A Body Cap: The body cap keeps the
mirror, viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust
when a lens is not in place.
Wireless
remote
controllers
•WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller/WR-T10 Wireless Remote
Controller: When a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is
attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using
a WR-T10 wireless remote controller (0270).
•WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller (0270): The WR-1 can
function as either a transmitter or a receiver and is used
in combination either with another WR-1 or a WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controller. For example, a WR-1
can be connected to the accessory terminal for use as a
receiver, allowing the shutter to be released remotely by
another WR-1 acting as a transmitter.
Microphones •ME-1 Stereo Microphone (0170)
•ME-W1 Wireless Microphone (0170)
324 Technical Notes
❚❚ Approved Memory Cards
The camera supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards, including SDHC and SDXC cards compliant
with UHS-I. Cards rated UHS Speed Class 6 or better
are recommended for movie recording; using slower cards may
result in recording being interrupted.
When choosing cards for
use in card readers, be sure they are compatible with the device.
Contact the manufacturer for information on features,
operation, and limitations on use.
Accessory
terminal
accessories
The D5600 is equipped with
an accessory terminal for
WR-1 and WR-R10 wireless
remote controllers, MC-DC2
remote cords (0125), and
GP-1/GP-1A GPS units (0269),
which connect with the H
mark on the connector aligned with the F next to the
accessory terminal (close the connector cover when the
terminal is not in use).
USB cables UC-E20 USB Cable (0211, 214)
HDMI cables
(0218)
HC-E1 HDMI Cable: An HDMI cable with a type C connector
for connection to the camera and a type A connector for
connection to HDMI devices.
AOptional Accessories
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or
brochures for the latest information.
325Technical Notes
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power
connector and AC adapter.
1Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber
(q) and power connector
(w) covers.
2Insert the EP-5A power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the
orientation shown, using the
connector to keep the orange battery
latch pressed to one side.
Be sure the
connector is fully inserted.
3Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power
connector cable so that it
passes through the power
connector slot and close
the battery-chamber cover.
326 Technical Notes
4Connect the EH-5b/EH-5c AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC
adapter (e) and the power cable to the DC socket (r).
A P
icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered
by the AC adapter and power connector.
327Technical Notes
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place.
To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area.
Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
•are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
•are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
•are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Caring for the Camera
Camera body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently
with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the camera at the beach
or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may
cause damage not covered under warranty.
Lens, mirror,
and
viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged.
Remove dust
and lint with a blower.
If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid.
To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower.
When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with
a soft cloth or chamois leather.
Do not apply pressure, as
this could result in damage or malfunction.
328 Technical Notes
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu.
The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning.
1 flashes in
the viewfinder and other operations can
not be performed while cleaning is in
progress.
Do not remove or disconnect
the power source until cleaning ends and
the setup menu is displayed.
329Technical Notes
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Select Clean image sensor, then
highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Choose from Clean at startup, Clean
at shutdown, Clean at startup &
shutdown, and Cleaning off.
DImage Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor.
If dust can not
be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu,
clean the image sensor manually (0330) or consult a Nikon-
authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry.
Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
330 Technical Notes
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor
using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu
(0328), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described
below.
Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and
easily damaged.
Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned
only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
1Charge the battery.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the image sensor.
Be sure the battery is fully
charged before proceeding.
2Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and highlight
Lock mirror up for cleaning in the
setup menu and press 2 (note that
this option is not available at battery
levels of H or below).
4Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor.
5Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down.
The mirror will be
raised and the shutter curtain will
open, revealing the image sensor.
331Technical Notes
6Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
interior of the camera for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present,
proceed to Step 8.
7Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower.
Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor.
Dirt that can not
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or
wipe the sensor.
8Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
AUse a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged.
If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close
automatically.
To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
•Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
•If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes.
End
cleaning or inspection immediately.
332 Technical Notes
DForeign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap.
Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
image sensor cleaning option as described on page 328.
If the
problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0330) or have the
sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel.
Photographs
affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be
retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging
applications.
DServicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing.
Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services).
Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally.
Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
333Technical Notes
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity.
Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device.
To prevent
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period.
Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
334 Technical Notes
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth.
After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged.
Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid.
To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0328, 330) for information on cleaning
the image sensor.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged.
Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower.
These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area.
If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire.
If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant.
Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate.
Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place.
Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
335Technical Notes
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective.
Hence while these displays may contain
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the
device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction.
Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather.
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an
image containing a regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave
in cloth or windows in a building, with the camera image sensor grid.
If
you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance to the
subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject
and the camera.
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled.
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xiii–xvi of
this manual.
Observe the following precautions when handling
batteries and chargers:
•Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
•Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
•Keep the battery terminals clean.
•Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
•Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover.
These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function.
If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and
storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C
(59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations).
Repeat this
process at least once every six months.
336 Technical Notes
•Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life.
Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
•The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use.
Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially.
Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
•Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C
(41 °F–95 °F).
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance.
Capacity may be
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures
from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or
above 60 °C (140 °F).
•If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery.
If the
problem persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger
to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
•Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
•Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
•A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.
•Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
•Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
337Technical Notes
•Charge the battery before use.
When taking photographs on
important occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase
replacement batteries on short notice.
Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease.
Be sure the battery is fully
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather.
Keep a
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
•Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
338 Technical Notes
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each
mode.
Note that some settings may be unavailable depending
on the options selected.
Available Settings
i j
P, S ,
A, M
k,
p,
n,
o,
s,
w,
0
l,
m,
r,
t,
u,
v,
x,
y,
z%
S,
TU ' ( 3
1,
2,
3
Shooting menu
ISO sensitivity ——z
z
1
z
1—
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
z
1
White balance ——z—————————
Set Picture Control ——z—————————
Active D-Lighting —2—2z—2—2———
2————
HDR (high dynamic
range) ——z—————————
Long exposure NR zzzzz—zzzzzz
High ISO NR zzzzz—zzzzzz
Time-lapse movie zzzzz———————
Other settings
Focus mode
(viewfinder) zzzzz—zzzzzz
AF-area mode
(viewfinder) zzzzz—zzz—zz
Focus mode (live
view/movie) zzzzzzzzzzzz
AF-area mode (live
view/movie) ——zzz
z
3z
z
3
z
3—
z
3z
339Technical Notes
1Auto ISO sensitivity control is not available.
2Fixed at Auto.
3 Subject-tracking AF is not available.
4Not available in 0 mode.
5Not available in w mode.
6Available only in x, y, and z modes.
Other settings
Metering ——z—————————
Bracketing ——z—————————
Flash compensation ——zzz———————
Exposure
compensation ——zzzz——————
Flash mode z—z
z
4——zzz———
Custom setting menu
a3: Built-in AF-assist
illuminator zzz
z
5
z
6—zzz—zz
e1: Flash cntrl for
built-in flash/
Optional flash
——z—————————
e2: Auto bracketing
set ——z—————————
i j
P, S ,
A, M
k,
p,
n,
o,
s,
w,
0
l,
m,
r,
t,
u,
v,
x,
y,
z%
S,
TU ' ( 3
1,
2,
3
340 Technical Notes
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
Troubleshooting
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end.
If the
problem persists, turn the camera off.
If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter.
Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (041).
If this does not
correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 082), single-
point AF (c; 087), and the center focus point, and then frame a high-
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus the camera.
With the camera in focus, use the
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder.
If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using
optional corrective lenses (0322).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (026, 27).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting
c2 (Auto off timers; 0240).
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is
pressed halfway or eye sensor has turned display off.
If information
display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-
release button or uncover eye sensor, confirm that On is selected for
Auto info display (0265) and that battery is charged (026).
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness
of this display vary with temperature.
341Technical Notes
Shooting (All Modes)
Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is
highlighted: These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and
do not indicate a malfunction.
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
•Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (027, 351).
•Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock (0268) and no
memory card is inserted (027).
•Built-in flash is charging (054).
•Camera is not in focus (050).
•CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at
highest f-number (0307).
•Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0308).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting
mode: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (077,
101).
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and
vertical frame coverage is approximately 95%.
Photos are out of focus:
•AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens or
focus manually.
•Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus
lock (086, 93, 95).
•Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (095).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L)
button to lock focus when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus
mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode (093).
342 Technical Notes
Can not select focus point:
•e(Auto-area AF; 088) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.
•Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (053).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (082, 95).
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
•AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus
mode (082) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the
camera is in AF-A mode.
Choose AF-S. If an option other than e(Auto-
area AF) is selected for AF-area mode, select center focus point (087,
90).
•The camera is currently in live view.
•Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator,
0237).
•Illuminator has turned off automatically.
Illuminator may become hot
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (099).
Camera is slow to record photos:
•Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance,
memory card access lamp may light for up to about a minute after
shooting ends in continuous release modes.
•Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0230).
343Technical Notes
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
•Bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and lines can be
reduced by lowering ISO sensitivity.
•Use the Long exposure NR option in the shooting menu to limit the
occurrence of bright spots or fog in photos taken at shutter speeds
slower than 1 s (0230).
•Fog and bright spots may indicate that the camera’s internal
temperature has become elevated due to high ambient temperatures,
long exposures, or similar causes: turn the camera off and wait for it to
cool before resuming shooting.
•At high ISO sensitivities, lines may appear in photos taken with some
optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower value.
•At high ISO sensitivities, including high values selected with auto ISO
sensitivity control, randomly-spaced bright pixels can be reduced by
selecting High, Normal, or Low for High ISO NR in the shooting menu
(0231).
•At high ISO sensitivities, bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or lines may be more noticeable in long exposures, and photos
taken at high ambient temperatures or with Active D-Lighting enabled,
Flat selected for Set Picture Control (0155) or extreme values
selected for Picture Control parameters (0158).
•In % mode, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may be more
noticeable in pictures shot under low light.
Can not choose a release mode: Release mode selection is not available when
the monitor is off (075).
Note that the eye sensor may turn the monitor
off automatically when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
344 Technical Notes
Beep does not sound:
•Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off (0263).
•Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (078), or movie is being
recorded (0164).
•MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is
selected (082).
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements.
If
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0328).
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image
quality (099, 243).
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
settings > Microphone (0169).
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:
•The ambient temperature is high
•The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
•The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Note that the camera may
feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear during live view: “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on
the view through the lens (053) during live view; in movies, the amount
and distribution of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and bright spots
are affected by frame size and rate (0168).
Randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during live view; exit live
view when the camera is not in use.
345Technical Notes
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option
for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
supply (0268).
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie
recording.
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shutter-release disabled:
•Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0308).
•Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected
in mode M: choose new shutter speed (0121).
•If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled
and viewfinder exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient
space on memory card to record all images in bracketing sequence.
Insert new memory card.
Full range of shutter speeds not available:
•Flash in use (0106).
•When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in
the shooting menu, the range of available shutter speed varies with the
frame rate (0169).
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens
used.
Colors are unnatural:
•Adjust white balance to match light source (0140).
•Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0155).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0147).
346 Technical Notes
Playback
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not
created with D5600 (0149).
White balance bracketing unavailable: NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality
option selected for image quality (098).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation.
For consistent results over a
series of photos, choose another setting (0159).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0130).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Camera is in mode M.
Choose another
mode (0118, 132).
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
exposure noise reduction (0230).
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
(RAW)+JPEG (098).
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0221).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
•Select On for Rotate tall (0222).
•Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0222).
•Photo is displayed in image review (0221).
•Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0222).
Can not delete picture:
•Picture is protected: remove protection (0200).
•Memory card is locked (0350).
347Technical Notes
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera
(0279).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Transfer
photos to computer and print using Capture NX-D (0210).
NEF (RAW)
photos can be saved in JPEG format using NEF (RAW) processing
(0280).
Picture is not displayed on TV: HDMI (0218) cable is not correctly connected.
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
•Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0219).
•Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in
documentation provided with the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or
transfer software.
Use card reader to copy photos to computer.
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor.
Image Dust
Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed.
Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before
image sensor cleaning is performed (0266).
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,
or vignette control.
Use Capture NX-D (0210).
348 Technical Notes
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Miscellaneous
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
•Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the camera
setup menu (0271).
•Confirm that Enable is selected for Bluetooth > Network connection
in the camera setup menu.
•Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Can not connect to smart devices using NFC: Choose another connection
method.
Can not connect to wireless printers and other wireless devices: This camera can
connect only to devices to which the SnapBridge app has been installed.
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (040, 262).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted (027,
277, 338).
349Technical Notes
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the viewfinder and monitor.
Error Messages
AWarning Icons
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a
warning or error message can be displayed in the monitor by pressing
the W (Q) button.
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
Lock lens aperture ring
at minimum aperture
(largest f/-number).
B
(flashes)
Set lens aperture ring to
minimum aperture (highest
f-number).
307
Lens not attached F/s
(flashes)
•Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens. 307
•If non-CPU lens is attached,
select mode M.
123
Before taking photos,
rotate the zoom ring to
extend the lens.
F
(flashes)
A lens with a retractable lens
barrel button is attached with
the lens barrel retracted. Press
the retractable lens barrel
button and rotate the zoom
ring to extend the lens.
31
Shutter release disabled.
Recharge battery.
d/s
(flashes)
Turn camera off and recharge
or replace battery. 26, 27
This battery cannot be
used. It does not
communicate properly
with this camera. To use
the camera safely,
choose a battery
designated for use in
this camera.
d
(flashes) Use Nikon-approved battery. 321
350 Technical Notes
Initialization error. Turn
camera off and then on
again.
d/k
(flashes)
Turn camera off, remove and
replace battery, and then turn
camera on again.
27
Battery level is low.
Complete operation and
turn camera off
immediately.
—
End cleaning and turn camera
off and recharge or replace
battery.
331
Clock not set s
(flashes) Set camera clock. 40,
262
No memory card
inserted
S/s
(flashes)
Turn camera off and confirm
that card is correctly inserted. 27
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write”
position.
(
(flashes)
Memory card is locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to “write”
position.
—
Cannot access this
memory card.
Insert another card.
(/k
(flashes)
•Use approved card. 324
•Format card.
If problem
persists, card may be
damaged.
Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
259
•Error creating new folder.
Delete files or insert new
memory card.
27,
205
•Insert new memory card. 27
•Eye-Fi card is still emitting
wireless signal after Disable
has been selected for Eye-Fi
upload.
To terminate
wireless transmission, turn
the camera off and remove
the card.
274
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
351Technical Notes
Not available if Eye-Fi
card is locked.
(/k
(flashes)
Eye-Fi card is locked (write
protected).
Slide card write-
protect switch to “write”
position.
—
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
T
(flashes)
Format card or turn camera
off and insert new memory
card.
27,
259
Card is full j/A/s
(flashes)
•Reduce quality or size. 98
•Delete photographs. 205
•Insert new memory card. 27
—●
(flashes)
Camera can not focus using
autofocus.
Change
composition or focus
manually.
50, 86,
95
Subject is too bright
s
(flashes)
•Use a lower ISO sensitivity. 107
•Use commercial ND filter. 321
•In mode:
SIncrease shutter speed 121
AChoose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
122
%Choose another
shooting mode
4, 65
Subject is too dark
•Use a higher ISO sensitivity. 107
•Use flash. 101
•In mode:
SLower shutter speed 121
AChoose a larger aperture
(lower f-number)
122
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
352 Technical Notes
No “Bulb” in S mode A/s
(flashes) Change shutter speed or
select mode M.
121,
123
No “Time” in S mode &/s
(flashes)
No “Bulb” in HDR mode A/s
(flashes) •Change shutter speed.
•Turn HDR off.
124,
125
138
No “Time” in HDR mode &/s
(flashes)
Interval timer shooting —
Menus and playback are not
available while interval timer
photography is in progress. To
pause, press J.
109
Time-lapse photography —
Menus and playback are not
available while time-lapse
photography is in progress.
175
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
353Technical Notes
—N
(flashes)
Flash has fired at full power.
Check photo in monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
—
—N/s
(flashes)
•Use the flash. 101
•Change distance to subject,
aperture, flash range, or ISO
sensitivity.
106,
107,
122
•Lens focal length is less than
18 mm: use a longer focal
length.
—
•Optional SB-400 or SB-300
flash unit attached: flash is in
bounce position or focus
distance is very short.
Continue shooting; if
necessary, increase focus
distance to prevent
shadows from appearing in
photograph.
—
Error. Press shutter
release button again.
O
(flashes)
Release shutter.
If error
persists or appears frequently,
consult Nikon-authorized
service representative.
—
Start-up error. Contact a
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Consult Nikon-authorized
service representative. —
Metering error
Unable to start live view.
Please wait for camera
to cool.
—
Wait for the internal circuits to
cool before resuming live
view or movie recording.
344
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
354 Technical Notes
Folder contains no
images. —
Folder selected for playback
contains no images.
Select
folder containing images
from Playback folder menu
or insert memory card
containing images.
27,
221
Cannot display this file. —File can not be played back on
camera. —
Cannot select this file. —Images created with other
devices can not be retouched. 278
This movie cannot be
edited. —
•Movies created with other
devices can not be edited.
278
•Movies must be at least two
seconds long.
178
No image for retouching. —
Memory card does not
contain NEF (RAW) images for
use with NEF (RAW)
processing.
280
Network access not
available until camera
cools.
—
Turn camera off and try again
after waiting for camera to
cool.
—
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
355Technical Notes
Check printer. —Check printer.
To resume,
select Continue (if available). —*
Check paper. —
Paper is not selected size.
Insert paper of correct size
and select Continue.
—*
Paper jam. —Clear jam and select
Continue.—*
Out of paper. —Insert paper of selected size
and select Continue.—*
Check ink supply. —Check ink.
To resume, select
Continue.—*
Out of ink. —Replace ink and select
Continue.—*
* See printer manual for more information.
Indicator
Solution 0Monitor Viewfinder
356 Technical Notes
❚❚ Nikon D5600 Digital Camera
Specifications
Type
Type Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to
approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle
of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels 24.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor 23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels 24.78 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off
reference data (Capture NX-D software
required)
Storage
Image size (pixels) •6000 × 4000 (Large)
•4496 × 3000 (Medium)
•2992 × 2000 (Small)
File format •NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed
•JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression
•NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,
Landscape, Flat; selected Picture Control can be
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC
and SDXC memory cards
File system DCF 2.0, Exif 2.3, PictBridge
357Technical Notes
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex
viewfinder
Frame coverage Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.82× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,
–1.0 m–1)
Eyepoint 17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment –1.7–+0.5 m–1
Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen
Reflex mirror Quick return
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Autofocus support Autofocus is available with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I
lenses.
Shutter
Type Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-
plane shutter
Speed 1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2EV; Bulb; Time
Flash sync speed X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or
slower
Release
Release mode 8 (single frame), !(continuous L),
9(continuous H), J(quiet shutter release),
E(self-timer); interval timer photography
supported
Frame advance rate •!: Up to 3 fps
•9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or
4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)
Note: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF,
manual or shutter-priority auto exposure, a
shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, Release
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority
selection), and other settings at default values.
Self-timer 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures
358 Technical Notes
Exposure
Metering mode TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor
Metering method •Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II
(type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix
metering II (other CPU lenses)
•Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given
to 8-mm circle in center of frame
•Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about
2.5% of frame) centered on selected focus
point
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens,
20 °C/68 °F)
•Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
•Spot metering: 2– 20 EV
Exposure meter coupling CPU
Mode Auto modes (iauto; jauto, flash off );
programmed auto with flexible program (P);
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto
(A); manual (M); scene modes (kportrait;
llandscape; pchild; msports; nclose up;
onight portrait; rnight landscape; sparty/
indoor; tbeach/snow; usunset; vdusk/
dawn; wpet portrait; xcandlelight; yblossom;
zautumn colors; 0food); special effects modes
(%night vision; S super vivid; T pop; U photo
illustration; ' toy camera effect; (miniature
effect; 3selective color; 1silhouette; 2high
key; 3low key)
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2EV in P, S, A, M, h, and % modes
359Technical Notes
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with
A(L) button
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure
Index)
ISO 100 – 25600 in steps of 1/3 EV.
Auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal,
R Low, ! Off
Focus
Autofocus Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, 39 focus
points (including 9 cross-type sensors), and
AF-assist illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/
1ft 8in.–9ft 10in.)
Detection range –1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Lens servo •Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C
selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking
activated automatically according to subject
status
•Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
Focus point Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-
area AF, 3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
A (L) button
Exposure
360 Technical Notes
Flash
Built-in flash i, k, p, n, o, s, w, S, T, U, ' : Auto flash
with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft,
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB
sensor is available with built-in flash; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with
matrix and center-weighted metering, standard
i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow
sync, auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fill-
flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync
with red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow
sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash compensation Can be adjusted by –3 – +1 EV in increments of
1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, M, and h modes
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit
is fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full
output
Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Nikon CLS supported
Sync terminal AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available
separately)
White balance
White balance Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual, all
except preset manual with fine-tuning.
Bracketing
Bracketing types Exposure, white balance, and ADL
361Technical Notes
Live view
Lens servo •Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-
servo AF (AF-F)
•Manual focus (MF)
AF-area mode Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,
subject-tracking AF
Autofocus Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera
selects focus point automatically when face-
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
Automatic scene selection Available in i and j modes
Movie
Metering TTL exposure metering using main image
sensor
Metering method Matrix
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
•1920 × 1080; 60p (progressive), 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
•1280 × 720; 60p, 50p
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and
24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively; options support both ★ high and
normal image quality
File format MOV
Video compression H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
ISO sensitivity ISO 100–25600
Other options Time-lapse movies
Monitor
Monitor 8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 ×
480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots), TFT vari-angle LCD
touch screen with 170 ° viewing angle, approx.
100% frame coverage, brightness adjustment,
and eye-sensor controlled on/off
362 Technical Notes
Playback
Playback Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or
calendar) playback with playback zoom,
playback zoom cropping, playback face zoom,
movie playback, photo and/or movie slide
shows, histogram display, highlights, photo
information, location data display, auto image
rotation, picture rating, and image comment
(up to 36 characters)
Interface
USB Hi-Speed USB with Micro-USB connector;
connection to built-in USB port is
recommended
HDMI output Type C HDMI connector
Accessory terminal •Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10
(available separately)
•Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)
•GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
ZAudio input Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter);
supports optional ME-1 stereo microphones
Wireless/Bluetooth
Wireless •Standards: IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
•Operating frequency: 2412–2462 MHz
(channels 1–11)
•Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
Bluetooth Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.1
Range (line of sight) Approximately 10 m (32 ft) without
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles
NFC
Operation NFC Forum Type 3 Tag
363Technical Notes
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Supported languages
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,
Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,
Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
Power source
Battery One EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion battery
AC adapter EH-5b/EH-5c AC adapter; requires EP-5A power
connector (available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket 1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Approx. 124 × 97 × 70 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 2.8 in.)
Weight Approx. 465 g (1 lb 0.4 oz) with battery and
memory card but without body cap; approx.
415 g/14.7 oz (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity 85% or less (no condensation)
364 Technical Notes
❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger
The symbols on this product represent the following:
mAC, pDC, qClass II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Rated input AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum
Rated output DC 8.4 V/0.9 A
Supported batteries Nikon EN-EL14a rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.),
excluding plug adapter
Weight Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter
Type Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.2 V/1230 mAh
Operating temperature 0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)
Weight Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover
365Technical Notes
❚❚ Supported Standards
•DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF)
is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to
ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
•Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in
which information stored with photographs is used for
optimal color reproduction when the images are output on
Exif-compliant printers.
•PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with
the digital camera and printer industries, allowing
photographs to be output directly to a printer without first
transferring them to a computer.
•HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV
devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control
signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable
connection.
366 Technical Notes
ATrademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac, OS X,
Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, and iPod touch®
are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
The Android robot is
reproduced or modified from work created and shared by Google and
used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0
Attribution License.
PictBridge logo is a trademark.
The SD, SDHC, and
SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo
and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC
Forum, Inc., in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Nikon Corporation
is under license.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
367Technical Notes
AConformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using
the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (0276).
AFreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org).
All rights reserved.
AMIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2016 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz).
All rights
reserved.
368 Technical Notes
ACertificates
369Technical Notes
The camera can be purchased as a kit with the lens listed below.
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR
This retractable lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon
digital SLR cameras; SLR film cameras and D4-series, D3-series,
D2-series, D1-series, D800-series, D700, D610, D600, D300-series,
D200, D100, D90, D80, D70-series, D60, D50, D40-series, D7000,
D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100, D3000 digital SLR cameras are not
supported.
When using these lenses with a D5500, D5300, or
D3300, be sure the camera firmware has been updated to the
latest version.
The parts of the lens are listed below.
Lens Kits
1Lens cap
2Lens hood mounting mark
3Retractable lens barrel button... 31
4Focal length scale
5Focal length mark
6Lens mounting mark.................... 30
7CPU contacts................................307
8Focus ring ....................................... 95
9Zoom ring....................................... 49
10 Rear lens cap
370 Technical Notes
❚❚ Focus
The focus mode can be selected using camera controls (082).
Autofocus
Focus is adjusted automatically when the camera is in autofocus
mode (082). The focus ring can also be used to focus the
camera if the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway (or
if the AF-ON button is kept pressed); this is known as “autofocus
with manual override” (M/A). Autofocus will resume when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway (or the AF-ON button
is pressed) a second time. Note that touching the focus ring
while autofocus is in effect will change the focus position.
Manual Focus
When the camera is in manual focus mode, focus can be
adjusted by rotating the lens focus ring (095). When the
camera is off or the standby timer has expired, the focus ring can
not be used to focus and rotating the zoom ring will change the
focus position; before focusing, turn the camera on or press the
shutter-release button to reactivate the standby timer.
Users of D5, D810-series, Df, D750, D7200, D7100, and D5200
cameras should note that if the standby timer is allowed to
expire, the focus position will change when the timer is
restarted.
Refocus before shooting.
Longer standby times are
recommended for manual focus and in other situations in which
you may not release the shutter immediately after focusing.
371Technical Notes
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
When the lens is mounted on the following cameras, the built-in
flash may be unable to light the entire subject at ranges less than
those given below:
Shadow Vignetting
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
D5600/D5500/D5300/D5200/
D3400/D3300
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
24, 35, 45, and
55 mm No vignetting
372 Technical Notes
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR is mounted
on the camera, vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled
using the Optical VR option in the shooting menu (0232). If On
is selected, vibration reduction will take effect whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction
reduces blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds
up to 4.0 stops slower than would otherwise be the case,
increasing the range of shutter speeds available. The effects of
VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses
are measured using FX-format digital cameras, DX-format lenses
using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are measured at
maximum zoom.
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Vibration reduction is generally recommended when the camera is
mounted on a tripod, although you may prefer to turn it off
depending on shooting conditions and the type of tripod.
•Vibration reduction is recommended when the camera is mounted
on a monopod.
373Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•LC-55A 55 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•55 mm screw-on filters
•LF-4 Rear Lens Cap
•CL-0815 Lens Case
•HB-N106 Bayonet Hood
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol
on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may
occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be
reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
374 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-P DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–55 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 12 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lens
elements)
Angle of view 76° – 28° 50´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Autofocus controlled by stepping motor;
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.25 m (0.9 ft) from focal plane (096) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 55 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 64.5 mm maximum diameter ×
62.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount
flange when lens is retracted)
Weight Approx. 205 g (7.3 oz)
375Technical Notes
AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED VR
and AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED
These lenses are for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital
SLR cameras; SLR film cameras and D4-series, D3-series, D2-
series, D1-series, D800-series, D700, D610, D600, D300-series,
D200, D100, D90, D80, D70-series, D60, D50, D40-series, D7000,
D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100, D3000 digital SLR cameras are not
supported.
When using it with a D5500, D5300, or D3300, be
sure the camera firmware has been updated to the latest
version.
The parts of the lens are listed below.
1Lens cap
2Lens hood mounting mark
3Focus ring........................................95
4Zoom ring .......................................49
5Focal length scale
6Focal length mark
7Lens mounting mark.................... 30
8CPU contacts................................307
9Rear lens cap
376 Technical Notes
❚❚ Focus
The focus mode can be selected using camera controls (082).
Autofocus and rangefinder features are supported at all focal
lengths. When using this lens, ignore any sections of the camera
manual listing autofocus and rangefinder restrictions for lenses
with a maximum aperture slower than f/5.6.
Autofocus
Focus is adjusted automatically when the camera is in autofocus
mode (082). The focus ring can also be used to focus the
camera if the shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway (or
if the AF-ON button is kept pressed); this is known as “autofocus
with manual override” (M/A). Autofocus will resume when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway (or the AF-ON button
is pressed) a second time. Note that touching the focus ring
while autofocus is in effect will change the focus position.
Manual Focus
When the camera is in manual focus mode, focus can be
adjusted by rotating the lens focus ring (095). When the
camera is off or the standby timer has expired, the focus ring can
not be used to focus and rotating the zoom ring will change the
focus position; before focusing, turn the camera on or press the
shutter-release button to reactivate the standby timer.
Users of D5, D810-series, Df, D750, D7200, D7100, and D5200
cameras should note that if the standby timer is allowed to
expire, the focus position will change when the timer is
restarted. Refocus before shooting. Longer standby times are
recommended for manual focus and in other situations in which
you may not release the shutter immediately after focusing.
377Technical Notes
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR, AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300 mm f/4.5–6.3G ED
VR Only)
When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300 mm f/4.5–6.3G ED VR is
mounted on the camera, vibration reduction can be enabled or
disabled using the Optical VR option in the shooting menu
(0232). If On is selected, vibration reduction will take effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera shake,
allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would
otherwise be the case, increasing the range of shutter speeds
available. The effects of VR on shutter speed are measured
according to Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA)
standards; FX-format lenses are measured using FX-format
digital SLR cameras, DX-format lenses using DX-format cameras.
Zoom lenses are measured at maximum zoom.
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Vibration reduction is generally recommended when the camera is
mounted on a tripod, although you may prefer to turn it off
depending on shooting conditions and the type of tripod.
•Vibration reduction is recommended when the camera is mounted
on a monopod.
378 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•LC-58 58 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•58 mm screw-on filters
•LF-4 Rear Lens Cap
•CL-1020 Lens Case
•HB-77 Bayonet Hood
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use. When the hood is reversed, it can be attached and
removed by rotating it while holding it near the lock mark
(—).
379Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type Type G AF-P DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 70–300 mm
Maximum aperture f/4.5–6.3
Lens construction 14 elements in 10 groups (including 1 ED lens
element)
Angle of view 22° 50´ – 5° 20´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (70, 100, 135, 200, 300)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Autofocus controlled by stepping motor;
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction
(AF-P DX NIKKOR
70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED
VR only)
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 1.1 m (3.7 ft) from focal plane (096) at all zoom
positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •70 mm focal length: f/4.5–22
•300 mm focal length: f/6.3–32
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 58 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 72 mm maximum diameter × 125 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight •AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED VR:
Approx. 415 g (14.7 oz)
•AF-P DX NIKKOR 70–300mm f/4.5–6.3G ED:
Approx. 400 g (14.2 oz)
380 Technical Notes
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
This lens is for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital
camera. The parts of the lens are listed below.
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the
position of the lens A-M mode switch (082, 95).
AFocusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and
the lens A-M switch is set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the
shutter-release button pressed halfway after the autofocus operation
is complete and manually rotating the focus ring.
To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.
11 12
1Lens cap
2Lens hood mounting mark
3Zoom ring ....................................... 49
4Focal length scale
5Focal length mark
6Focus ring........................................95
7Lens mounting mark....................30
8Rubber lens-mount gasket
9CPU contacts................................307
10 A-M mode switch....................31, 95
11 Vibration reduction ON/OFF
switch ...........................................382
12 Rear lens cap
381Technical Notes
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
When the lens is mounted on the following cameras, the built-in
flash may be unable to light the entire subject at ranges less than
those given below:
Shadow Vignetting
Camera Zoom position
Minimum distance
without vignetting
D7200/D7100/D7000/
D300 series/D200/D100
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24–140 mm No vignetting
D90/D80/D50
18 mm 2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
24 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
35–140 mm No vignetting
D5600/D5500/D5300/D5200/
D5100/D5000/D3400/D3300/
D3200/D3100/D3000/D70 series/
D60/D40 series
18 mm 1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
24 mm
35–140 mm No vignetting
382 Technical Notes
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the
vibration reduction switch to ON and takes effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused
by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0
stops slower than would otherwise be the case (as measured at
140 mm with a D300s camera according to Camera and Imaging
Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the
photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the
range of shutter speeds available.
DVibration Reduction
•When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
•When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
•When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to
motion that is not part of the pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
•Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration
reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a
malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and
turning the camera on.
•If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
•Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod
head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which
case ON is recommended.
383Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
•LC-67 67 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap
•Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•67 mm screw-on filters
•LF-4 Rear Lens Cap
•CL-1018 Flexible Lens Pouch
•HB-32 Bayonet Hood
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate
the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with the lens hood
lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the
symbol on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly.
Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached.
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use.
384 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Type Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F
mount
Focal length 18–140 mm
Maximum aperture f/3.5–5.6
Lens construction 17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens
element, 1 aspherical lens element)
Angle of view 76° – 11° 30 ´
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (096) at all
zoom positions
Diaphragm blades 7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm Fully automatic
Aperture range •18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
•140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary
depending on the size of the exposure
increment selected with the camera.
Metering Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)
385Technical Notes
DLens Care
•Keep the CPU contacts clean.
•Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service center
for repair.
•Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces.
To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
•Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
•The lens hood or Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the
front lens element.
•Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its case.
•When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
•If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust.
Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
•Keep the lens dry.
Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
•Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
386 Technical Notes
AA Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those
shown below.
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:
If the focus point contains both
foreground and background objects,
the camera may focus on the
background and the subject may be
out of focus, particularly with wide-
and super wide-angle lenses. Example: A far-off portrait
subject at some distance from
the background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty
focusing on subjects that contain
many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another
subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph.
For
more information, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (086).
387Technical Notes
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro 95 MB/s
SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size settings.
Memory Card Capacity
Image quality Image size File size 1No.
of
images1
Buffer
capacity 2
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit — 26.3 MB 428 11
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit — 21.3 MB 511 17
JPEG fine
Large 13.4 MB 929 100
Medium 8.0 MB 1500 100
Small 4.1 MB 2900 100
JPEG normal
Large 6.8 MB 1800 100
Medium 4.1 MB 3000 100
Small 2.1 MB 5600 100
JPEG basic
Large 2.6 MB 3500 100
Medium 1.9 MB 5700 100
Small 1.2 MB 10,300 100
1 All figures are approximate.
Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene
recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops when
long exposure noise reduction (0230), auto distortion control (0232), or Date stamp
(0243) is on.
388 Technical Notes
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed.
Sample figures for EN-EL14a (1230 mAh)
batteries are given below.
•Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1):
Approximately 970 shots
•Movies: Approximately 70 minutes at 1080/60p 2
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on; tester waits for monitor to
turn off; flash fired at full power once every other shot.
Live view not used.
2 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and
an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR lens under conditions specified by
the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
Individual movies can be
up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits
are reached if the camera temperature rises.
Battery Life
389Technical Notes
The following can reduce battery life:
•Using the monitor
•Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
•Repeated autofocus operations
•Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
•Slow shutter speeds
•Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
•Using the camera with optional accessories connected
•Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
•Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens.
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL14a batteries:
•Keep the battery contacts clean.
Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
•Use batteries immediately after charging.
Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
390 Technical Notes
Symbols
i (Auto mode) ............................... 4, 47
j (Auto (flash off) mode)............ 4, 47
h (Scene)................................... 4, 58
k (Portrait) ............................................59
l (Landscape)......................................59
p (Child).................................................59
m (Sports)...............................................60
n (Close up)..........................................60
o (Night portrait)................................60
r (Night landscape)...........................61
s (Party/indoor)..................................61
t (Beach/snow)...................................61
u (Sunset)..............................................62
v (Dusk/dawn) ....................................62
w (Pet portrait) ....................................62
x (Candlelight)......................................63
y (Blossom)...........................................63
z (Autumn colors)..............................63
0 (Food) ..................................................64
q (Special effects) .................. 4, 65
% (Night vision) ...................................65
S (Super vivid) .....................................66
T (Pop) ..................................................66
U (Photo illustration)..................66, 70
' (Toy camera effect).................67, 71
( (Miniature effect) ....................67, 72
3 (Selective color).......................67, 73
1 (Silhouette).......................................68
2 (High key)..........................................68
3 (Low key)...........................................68
P (Programmed auto) ........4, 118, 119
S (Shutter-priority auto) ....4, 118, 121
A (Aperture-priority auto).4, 118, 122
M (Manual) .............................4, 118, 123
U (flexible program)........................ 120
8 (Single frame) .................................75
! (Continuous L)...................... 75, 76
9 (Continuous H)..................... 75, 76
E (Self-timer) ................................ 75, 79
J (Quiet shutter release)......... 75, 78
c (Single-point AF).......................... 87
d (Dynamic-area AF)....................... 87
e (Auto-area AF)............................... 88
f (3D-tracking) ................................. 88
6 (Face-priority AF)........................... 89
7 (Wide-area AF)................................ 89
8 (Normal-area AF) ........................... 89
9 (Subject-tracking AF)................. 90
L (Matrix metering) ........................128
M (Center-weighted metering)...128
N (Spot metering)............................128
o (auto flash)..............................102
j (red-eye reduction)..........102, 104
p (slow sync).....................102, 104
q (rear-curtain sync) ...............104
Y (Flash compensation)...............134
E (Exposure compensation) ........132
e (AE bracketing)....................151
f (WB bracketing) .................151
g (ADL bracketing) ...............151
d (Help) ................................................. 43
m (White balance) ...........................140
L (Preset manual)..........................145
I (focus indicator)............... 50, 93, 96
N (flash-ready indicator) .... 5, 54, 318
a (live view)................................ 47, 164
t (memory buffer) ....................77, 387
P button...............................12, 166, 187
R button........................................ 6, 115
Numerics
2016-pixel RGB sensor 247, 307, 358,
360
3D color matrix metering ..............307
Index
391Technical Notes
3D-tracking (AF-area mode)............88
A
AC adapter.................................321, 325
Access lamp...........................................51
Accessories ......................................... 321
Accessory terminal accessories... 324
Active D-Lighting ............................. 136
Add items (My Menu) ..................... 301
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
151
Adobe RGB.......................................... 230
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set).
151
AE lock.................................................. 130
AE-L ....................................................... 130
AE-L/AF-L button..................94, 130, 254
AF.............................................82–94, 235
AF area brackets ...........................41, 49
AF-A..........................................................82
AF-area mode .......................................87
AF-assist illuminator........85, 237, 310
AF-C................................................ 82, 235
AF-F ..........................................................83
AF-S ...................................................82, 83
Airplane mode................................... 271
A-M mode switch ...................... 95, 380
Angle of view..................................... 314
Aperture ........................... 118, 122, 124
Aperture-priority auto.................... 122
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ............... 254
Assign Fn button.............................. 252
Assign touch Fn ................................ 255
Auto (White balance)...................... 140
Auto bracketing.......................151, 251
Auto distortion control .................. 232
Auto flash............................................ 102
Auto image rotation........................ 222
Auto info display .............................. 265
Auto ISO sensitivity control.......... 228
Auto off timers .................................. 240
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode) ........ 88
Autoexposure lock ...........................130
Autofocus ............................. 82–94, 235
Auto-servo AF ...................................... 82
Available settings .............................338
B
Battery .......................... 26, 27, 321, 364
Beep options ......................................263
Black-and-white ................................290
Bluetooth....................................xxii, 273
Body cap ......................................... 1, 323
Border (PictBridge)...........................215
Bracketing ................................. 151, 251
Built-in AF-assist illuminator.85, 237,
310
Built-in flash.............................. 101, 312
Bulb.............................................. 125, 126
Burst......................................................... 76
C
Calendar playback............................186
Camera Control Pro 2......................323
Capture NX-D.....................................210
CEC.........................................................219
Center-weighted metering...........128
Charger................................ 26, 321, 364
Choose start/end point ..................178
Clean image sensor..........................328
Clock...............................................40, 262
Clock battery ........................................ 27
Cloudy (White balance)..................140
CLS .........................................................315
Color outline.......................................293
Color sketch........................................294
Color space .........................................230
Color temperature............................142
Commander mode...........................247
Compatible lenses............................305
Conformity marking .............. 276, 367
Connect to smart device................271
392 Technical Notes
Continuous (Release mode).....75, 76
Continuous-servo AF............... 82, 235
Copyright...................................193, 261
CPU contacts...................................... 307
CPU lens............................................... 305
Creative Lighting System.............. 315
Cropping (PictBridge)..................... 215
Cross screen (Filter effects)........... 289
Custom Settings............................... 233
Cyanotype .......................................... 290
D
Date and time.................................... 262
Date counter.............................243, 244
Date format................................. 40, 262
Date stamp......................................... 243
Daylight saving time................ 40, 262
DCF version 2.0 ................................. 365
Delete................................................... 205
Delete all images.............................. 206
Delete current image...................... 205
Delete selected images.................. 206
Device control (HDMI).................... 219
Diopter adjustment control .. 41, 322
Direct sunlight (White balance).. 140
Distortion control....................232, 287
D-Lighting........................................... 285
Dynamic-area AF.................................87
E
Edit movie..................................178, 182
Electronic rangefinder............. 96, 237
EV steps for exposure cntrl........... 239
Exif version 2.3 .................................. 365
Exposure............................128, 130, 132
Exposure bracketing....................... 151
Exposure compensation................ 132
Exposure delay mode..................... 241
Exposure indicator.................... 11, 124
Exposure lock .................................... 130
Exposure meters..................................53
Exposure mode .................................118
Exposure smoothing..............111, 173
External microphone..............170, 323
Eye sensor ...................................... 8, 265
Eye-Fi upload .....................................274
F
Face-priority AF................................... 89
Face zoom........................................... 199
File information.................................189
File naming.........................................227
File number sequence....................242
Filter effects.....................158, 160, 289
Filters.....................................................321
Fine-tuning white balance............143
Firmware version..............................276
Fisheye..................................................288
Flash ......................................54, 101, 315
Flash (White balance)......................140
Flash cntrl for built-in flash ...........246
Flash compensation ........................134
Flash control.......................................247
Flash mode ................................102, 104
Flash range..........................................106
Flash ready indicator........... 5, 54, 318
Flash sync speed......................106, 357
Flat (Set Picture Control)................155
Flexible program ..............................120
Flicker reduction......................167, 268
Fluorescent (White balance)140, 141
Fn button.............................................. 252
f-number..............................................122
Focal length........................................314
Focal length scale.......... 369, 375, 380
Focal plane mark................................. 96
Focus................................................ 82–97
Focus indicator...................... 50, 93, 96
Focus lock.............................................. 93
Focus mode.......................................... 82
Focus point ......50, 87, 90, 93, 96, 236
Focusing screen ................................357
393Technical Notes
Focus-mode switch .....................31, 95
Format memory card...................... 259
Frame interval (Slide show) .......... 209
Frame size/frame rate..................... 168
Framing grid ..................................9, 243
Front-curtain sync............................ 104
Full-frame playback......................... 184
Full-time-servo AF...............................83
G
GPS device.......................................... 269
H
H.264..................................................... 361
HDMI............................................218, 365
HDMI-CEC............................................ 219
HDR (high dynamic range) ........... 138
Help..........................................................43
High definition .........................218, 365
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ......... 138
High ISO NR........................................ 231
High-angle shots .................................13
Highlights...................................189, 221
Histogram ..................................190, 221
I
Image comment ............................... 260
Image Dust Off ref photo .............. 266
Image overlay.................................... 291
Image quality........................................98
Image review ..................................... 221
Image size ........................................... 100
Incandescent (White balance)..... 140
Info display auto off ....................8, 265
Info display format........................... 264
In-focus indicator ..................50, 93, 96
Information display .....................6, 264
Interval timer shooting .................. 109
ISO display .......................................... 239
ISO sensitivity ...........................107, 228
i-TTL..............................................246, 247
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR.............................................. 247, 315
J
JPEG......................................................... 98
JPEG basic.............................................. 98
JPEG fine ................................................ 98
JPEG normal.......................................... 98
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control)..155
Language.............................................262
Large (Image size).............................100
Lens....................................... 30, 305, 369
Lens focus ring.........95, 369, 375, 380
Lens mount................................1, 30, 96
Lens vibration reduction switch... 32,
382
Live view .......................................47, 164
Location data ........................... 195, 269
Lock mirror up for cleaning...........330
Long exposure NR............................230
Low-angle shots.................................. 13
M
Manage Picture Control .................161
Manual...........................................95, 123
Manual focus................................. 83, 95
Manual focus ring in AF mode.....238
Manual movie settings ...................169
Matrix metering.................................128
Maximum sensitivity .......................228
Medium (Image size).......................100
Memory buffer..................................... 77
Memory card ............27, 259, 324, 387
Memory card capacity ....................387
Metering ..............................................128
Microphone ........................................169
Miniature effect..........................72, 295
Minimum shutter speed.................228
Mired .....................................................144
394 Technical Notes
Mirror................................................1, 330
Mode dial ................................................. 4
Monitor................................13, 184, 263
Monitor brightness.......................... 263
Monochrome..................................... 290
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)...
155
Mounting mark........30, 369, 375, 380
Movie quality..................................... 168
Movie settings................................... 168
Movie-record button ...................... 165
Movies.................................................. 164
My Menu ............................................. 301
N
NEF (RAW)...........................98, 227, 280
NEF (RAW) processing.................... 280
NEF (RAW) recording ...................... 227
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 155
Nikon Transfer 2 ............................... 212
No. of copies (PictBridge).............. 215
Non-CPU lens..................................... 308
Normal-area AF....................................89
Number of exposures remaining ..46
Number of focus points................. 236
Number of shots............................... 388
O
Optical VR ........................................... 232
Optional flash .................................... 315
Output resolution (HDMI)............. 219
Overview data................................... 194
P
Page size (PictBridge) ..................... 215
Painting ............................................... 298
Perspective control ......................... 288
Photo Illustration ...................... 70, 294
Photo information ..................188, 221
PictBridge...................................214, 365
Picture Controls.......................155, 157
Playback...............................................184
Playback display options ...............221
Playback folder..................................221
Playback information.............188, 221
Playback menu..................................220
Playback zoom ..................................196
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ........155
Power connector .....................321, 325
Preset manual (White balance) .. 140,
145
Press the shutter-release button all
the way down ............................. 51, 52
Press the shutter-release button
halfway .......................................... 50, 52
Print date (PictBridge).....................215
Print select ..........................................216
Printing.................................................214
Programmed auto............................119
Protecting photographs ................200
Q
Quick retouch ....................................286
Quiet shutter release.................. 75, 78
R
Rangefinder........................................237
Rank items (My Menu)....................304
Rating...........................................201, 209
Rear-curtain sync..............................104
Recent settings..................................300
Red-eye correction...........................286
Red-eye reduction...................102, 104
Release mode....................................... 75
Remote control.........................270, 323
Remote cord..............................125, 324
Remote shutter release ..................270
Remove items (My Menu)..............303
Reset................................... 115, 225, 235
Reset custom settings.....................235
Reset shooting menu......................225
Resize ....................................................283
395Technical Notes
Retouch menu................................... 277
Retractable lens barrel button.31, 32
Reverse dial rotation ....................... 256
Reverse indicators............................ 245
RGB...............................................190, 230
RGB histogram .................................. 190
Rotate tall............................................ 222
S
Save selected frame ........................ 182
Scene auto selector............................52
Scene mode ..........................................58
Select to send to smart device .... 204
Select to send to smart device/
deselect.............................................. 203
Selective color ............................ 73, 296
Self-portrait ...........................................13
Self-timer............................... 75, 79, 241
Send to smart device (auto) ......... 272
Sensitivity...................................107, 228
Sepia ..................................................... 290
Set Picture Control........................... 157
Setup menu........................................ 257
Shade (White balance) ................... 140
Shooting data.................................... 192
Shooting menu................................. 223
Shutter speed ................. 118, 121, 123
Shutter-priority auto....................... 121
Shutter-release button.......51, 52, 93,
130, 239
Shutter-release button AE-L......... 239
Side-by-side comparison............... 298
Single frame (Release mode) ..........75
Single-point AF (AF-area mode) ....87
Single-servo AF .............................82, 83
Size ..................................... 100, 168, 282
Skylight (Filter effects).................... 289
Slide show........................................... 208
Slot empty release lock.................. 268
Slow sync....................................102, 104
Small (Image size) ............................ 100
SnapBridge......................................... i, 33
Soft (Filter effects) ............................289
Special effects mode ......................... 65
Speedlight...........................................315
Spot metering....................................128
sRGB.......................................................230
Standard (Set Picture Control).....155
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR.............................................. 247, 315
Standby timer .............................53, 240
Start printing (PictBridge).... 216, 217
Storage folder ....................................225
Straighten............................................287
Subject-tracking AF ........................... 90
Sync with smart device...................262
T
Television.............................................218
Thumbnail playback ........................185
Time............................................. 125, 127
Time zone.....................................40, 262
Time zone and date ..................40, 262
Time-lapse movie .............................171
Timer ..............................................79, 109
Toning......................................... 158, 160
Touch controls.................. 15, 160, 263
Touch screen ........................................ 15
Touch shutter....................................... 19
Trim.............................................. 198, 282
Trimming movies..............................178
Type D lens..........................................307
Type E lens ..........................................307
Type G lens..........................................307
U
USB cable..........................211, 214, 324
V
Vari-angle monitor............................. 13
Vibration reduction32, 232, 372, 377,
382
396 Technical Notes
Viewfinder ............................... 5, 41, 357
Viewfinder eyepiece cap..................80
Viewfinder grid display.................. 243
ViewNX-i.............................................. 210
Vignette control ............................... 231
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 155
Volume........................................ 177, 208
W
Warm filter (Filter effects).............. 289
WB.......................................................... 140
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
151
White balance ................................... 140
Wide-area AF ........................................89
Wi-Fi..............................................xxii, 272
Wind noise reduction..................... 169
Wireless................................................. xxii
Wireless remote controller .. 270, 324
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB6I01(11)
6MB36711-01

Navigation menu